Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Service Manual

HiPath 1100
HiPath 1120
HiPath 1150
HiPath 1190
Service Manual
Important Information
1
System Data
2
HiPath 1100
Models Modules
HiPath 1120/1150/1190 3
Service Manual Installation
4
Selo CE
Telephones
The device conforms to the EU directive Operation

1999/5/EG, as attested by the CE mark.
6
Certificado Ambiental
Configuring the system specifically
for the client
7
This device has been manufactured in ac-
cordance with our certified environmental
Feature access codes
management system (ISO 14001). This
process minimises energy consumption, 8
the use of primary raw materials and waste
production.
Abbreviations
Index
10
Contents
Contents 0
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
1 Important Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1.1 Safety Information: danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.1.2 Safety Information: warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.3 Safety Information: Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.1.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.1.5 What to do in Case of an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.1.6 Accident Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.2 Data Protection and Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.3 Structure of this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
2 System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.3 Configurations HiPath 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.4 HiPath 1100 System Periphery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.5 System expansion limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.5.1 Considerations for digital lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.5.2 Considerations on system telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.5.3 Notes on HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.5.4 Notes on HiPath 1190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.7 Technical standards and compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.7.1 International Safety Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.7.2 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8 Documentation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.9 New in HiPath 1100 V7.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
3 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.2 Abbreviations for Country names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.3 List of modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.4 Motherboard (MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.4.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.4.2 HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.4.3 HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5 Expansion modules (EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.5.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Service Manual 3
Contents
3.5.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

3.5.3 S0 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.5.3.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.5.3.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.5.4 TME1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.5.5 UP0/E module and CTR UP0/E module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.5.5.1 UP0/E module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.5.5.2 CTR-UP0/E module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.6 Optional modules (MO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.6.1 LAN interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.6.1.1 ADSL module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.6.1.2 SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC and ADSLIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.6.1.3 Baby Board ADSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3.6.2 EVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3.6.3 CD 16 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3.6.4 Music module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3.6.4.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3.6.4.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3.7 Power Supply Unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3.7.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.7.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3.8 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.8.1 Examples of Configurations X Capacities x Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.9 Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.10 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3.10.1 HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3.10.2 HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3.11 Entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.11.1 Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.11.1.1 Examples of connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.11.1.2 TFE-S interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
3.11.2 External entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
3.11.2.1 Analog external entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
3.11.2.2 ISDN external entrance telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.12 Interconnect cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.12.1 V.24 Adapter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.12.2 USB adapter cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
3.12.3 TME1 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3.12.4 Adapter cable for analog modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
3.12.5 TME1 Coax Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3.12.5.1 CAS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3.12.5.2 S2 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
3.12.6 Battery interconnect cables (BBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
3.12.7 Power supply cable of the PSU - HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
4 Service Manual
Contents
4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4.1 HiPath 1100 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4.2 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.3 Select the location for installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.4 Unpacking system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.5 Getting to know your systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.5.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.5.2 HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
4.5.3 HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4.6 HiPath1120/1150 wall mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4.7 Installing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.7.1 Configuring the HiPath 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.7.2 Location of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.7.2.1 In the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
4.7.2.2 On the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
4.7.2.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
4.7.3 Installing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.7.3.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.7.3.2 On the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
4.7.3.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4.7.4 Installing a TME1 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4.7.5 ADSL Connection in the LAN interface modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4.7.5.1 ADSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4.7.5.2 SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC and ADSLIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4.7.6 Installing a Baby Board ADSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4.7.6.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4.7.6.2 On the HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
4.7.7 Installing an EVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
4.7.7.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
4.7.7.2 On the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4.7.7.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4.7.8 Installing a Baby Board VCC module
(Voltage Conditioner Circuitry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.7.8.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.7.9 Installing a CTR- UP0/E module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4.7.9.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4.7.9.2 On the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
4.7.9.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
4.7.10 Installing a Music module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4.7.10.1 On the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4.8 Installing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.8.1 On the HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.8.2 On the HiPath 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4.8.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
4.8.4 Installing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Service Manual 5
Contents
4.9 Connections to the systems MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170

4.9.1 HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
4.9.2 HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
4.9.3 HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
4.10 Installing a V.24 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
4.11 Installing a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
4.11.1 On the HiPath1120/1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
4.11.2 On the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4.12 Installing an external Audio Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.13 Installing a TFE - entrance telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.13.1 Models: S30817-K930-A300 and S30122-K7696-T313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.13.2 Model S30817-Q936-C282 - Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
4.14 Recommendations concerning the Power Supply and Protection of the System . . 4-182
4.14.1 Protection of external lines and extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.14.2 Connecting a safety ground wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
4.15 Protective power outage relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
4.16 System cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.17 Installing telephone terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.18 optiPoint Master/Slave telephone HiPath 1120 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
4.19 Performing a visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
5 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191
5.2 System Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191
5.2.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
5.2.2 Profiset 3030 System Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
5.2.3 E822 ST System telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-193
5.2.4 E821 ST System Telephone (for Brazil only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195
5.2.5 optiPoint 500 System Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-196
5.2.6 Programmable Feature Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-203
5.2.7 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-204
5.3 Common telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-204
5.3.1 Dial Pulse (DP) Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-204
5.3.2 Dual Tone Multifrequency Telephone (MF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-204
6 Configuring the system specifically for the client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205
6.1 Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205
6.2 Table of the Systems Programming Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207
6.2.1 Main Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208
6.2.2 External line settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210
6.2.3 Programming an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212
6.2.4 DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218
6.2.5 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218
6.2.6 Updating the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222
6.2.7 Remote Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222
6 Service Manual
Contents
6.2.8 Internal entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223

6.2.9 Call Detail Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223
6.2.10 Fax/DID Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226
6.2.11 EVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-228
6.2.12 Digital trunk settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-230
6.2.13 LAN interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-232
6.2.14 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-233
6.2.15 Run quick test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-234
6.3 Comments about the systems programming codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-234
6.3.1 Main Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-234
6.3.2 External line settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-237
6.3.3 Programming an extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-241
6.3.3.1 External Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-253
6.3.4 DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-253
6.3.5 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-254
6.3.6 Updating the Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-259
6.3.7 Remote configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-260
6.3.8 Internal entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
6.3.9 Call Detail Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
6.3.10 Fax/DID Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-267
6.3.11 EVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-269
6.3.12 Digital trunk settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-271
6.3.13 LAN interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-275
6.3.14 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-275
7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-278
7.1 Programming with a Telephone Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-279
7.2 System programming mode using a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-280
7.2.1 Local Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-281
7.2.1.1 V.24 Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-281
7.2.1.2 USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-283
7.2.1.3 LAN interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-285
7.2.1.4 optiPoint Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-287
7.2.2 Remote / Local connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-290
7.2.2.1 External Analog modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-290
7.2.2.2 ISDN modem via S0 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-293
7.3 Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-295
7.3.1 HiPath 1100 USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-295
7.3.1.1 Installation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-296
7.3.1.2 Installing USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-297
7.3.1.3 CAPI Application setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-313
7.3.1.4 Uninstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-313
7.3.2 optiPoint USB drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-314
7.3.2.1 Using the Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-315
7.3.2.2 Manual Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-315
Service Manual 7
Contents
7.3.2.3 CAPI Application setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-331

7.3.2.4 Uninstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-332
7.4 HiPath 1100 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-333
7.4.1 CTI Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-333
7.4.2 SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-334
7.4.3 HiPath 1100 Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
7.4.4 ADSL settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
7.4.4.1 ADSL module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336
7.4.4.2 SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC and ADSLIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-339
7.4.4.3 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-344
7.4.4.4 Returning to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-346
7.4.4.5 COMGATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-347
7.4.4.6 ECOMMSERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-349
7.4.4.7 How to release the ADSL feature in new Countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-350
7.4.4.8 Siemens Admin Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-352
7.4.4.9 Configuring the SpeedStream 4100 modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-354
7.4.5 LCR settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-355
7.4.5.1 GSM/SIP BOX with LCR support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-361
7.4.5.2 Importing the LCR from the Telefonsparbuch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-361
7.4.6 E1 Trunk Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-362
7.4.7 S2M Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-363
7.4.8 Account Manager (CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-363
7.4.9 Status Monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-363
7.4.10 MOH Transfer Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-364
7.4.11 Software Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-364
7.4.12 CAPI Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-364
7.4.13 Interaction Center Smart (Optional Software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-365
7.4.14 TAC Smart - Telephony Advanced Control (optional software) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-365
7.4.15 CallReport (optional software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-365
7.4.16 VMIe Protocol (Voice Mail Interface - extended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-366
8 Feature access codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-369
8.1 Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-369
8.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-370
8.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-370
9 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-382
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
8 Service Manual
Figures
Figures 0
Figure 2-1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Figure 2-2 HiPath 1120 Periphery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Figure 2-5 Distribution of the highways in the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 3-1 HiPath 1120s MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-2 HiPath 1120 Baby Board VCC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Figure 3-3 Overview of the HiPath 1150 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Figure 3-4 Overview of the HiPath 1190 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Figure 3-5 EB 200 module overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Figure 3-7 EB 210 module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Figure 3-8 EB 012 module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-10 HiPath 1120 S0 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Figure 3-11 Module S0 HiPath1150/1190/1190R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Figure 3-12 S0 Basic access connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Figure 3-13 S0 Connector signal distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Figure 3-14 TME1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-15 CAS access connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-16 S2 access connection with 75 ohm impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-17 S2 access connection with 120 ohm impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Figure 3-18 Signal distribution on the TME1 module Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Figure 3-19 DIP Switch for the TME1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-20 UP0/E module HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Figure 3-21 UP0/E module HiPath1150/1190/1190R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Figure 3-22 CTR-UP0/E module HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Figure 3-23 Functions via LAN network.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Figure 3-24 ADSL module HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Figure 3-25 ADSL module HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Figure 3-26 SLIMC and SDASLIM module HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Figure 3-27 LIMC and ADSLIM module HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Figure 3-28 Baby Board ADSL HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Figure 3-29 HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R EVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Figure 3-30 CD 16 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Figure 3-31 Music module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Figure 3-32 System PSU interface HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Figure 3-33 System PSU interface HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Figure 3-34 PSU systems interfaceHiPath 1190/1190R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Figure 3-35 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Service Manual 9
Figures
Figure 3-36 MDF - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101

Figure 3-37 Backplane HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Figure 3-38 HiPath 1190 backplanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Figure 3-39 Connections to the TFE interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Figure 3-40 EGUCOM entrance telephone by Ackermann (Emmerich) . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Figure 3-41 Grothe entrance telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Figure 3-42 HDL entrance telephone - Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Figure 3-43 Ritto entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Figure 3-44 Overview entrance telephone interface - S30817-Q936-C282 . . . . . . . 3-107
Figure 3-45 Connections of the TFE-S interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Figure 3-46 Assigning button pad contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Figure 3-47 Connection with Siedle TLM 511-01 and Ritto 5760 button pad . . . . . . 3-111
Figure 3-48 V.24 adapter cable connection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Figure 3-49 Modem and adapter connection system to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Figure 3-50 USB adapter cable connection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Figure 3-51 Serial cable connection to TME1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Figure 3-52 Connection system of the serial cable to the analog modem. . . . . . . . . 3-119
Figure 3-53 Battery interconnect cables (BBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Figure 3-54 Power supply cable of the PSU - HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Figure 4-1 Dimensions of the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Figure 4-2 Opening the HiPath 1120 Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Figure 4-3 System installation overview HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Figure 4-4 Dimensions of the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Figure 4-5 System installation overview HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Figure 4-6 Opening the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Figure 4-7 Dimensions of the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Figure 4-8 Opening the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Figure 4-9 HiPath 1190/1190R front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Figure 4-10 HiPath 1190/1190R back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Figure 4-11 HiPath 1190/1190R cable anchors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Figure 4-12 Installing modules on the HiPath 1190/1190R systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Figure 4-13 Installing the HiPath 1190R on a 19" rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Figure 4-14 Installing the HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Figure 4-15 Installing the HiPath 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Figure 4-16 Location of modules on HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Figure 4-17 Location of modules on HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Figure 4-18 Location of modules on HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Figure 4-19 Installing a TME1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Figure 4-20 ADSL Connection on the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Figure 4-21 ADSL Connection on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Figure 4-22 Installing a Baby Board ADSLmodule HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Figure 4-23 Installation module Baby Board ADSL on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R 4-153
Figure 4-24 Installing an EVM module HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Figure 4-25 Installing an EVM module HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
10 Service Manual
Figures
Figure 4-26 Installing an EVM module on the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Figure 4-27 Installing a Baby Board VCC module on the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Figure 4-28 Installing a CTR- UP0/E HiPath 1120 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Figure 4-29 Installing a CTR- UP0/E HiPath 1150 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Figure 4-30 Installing a CTR- UP0/E module on the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . 4-160
Figure 4-31 Installing a Music module HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Figure 4-32 Installing a power supply on the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Figure 4-33 Installing the PSU HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Figure 4-34 Installation of the PSU HiPath 1150 with BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Figure 4-35 Power cable of the PSU with BBU - HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Figure 4-36 Installing the PSU in the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Figure 4-37 Installing the PSU with BBU in the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Figure 4-38 Connecting batteries to the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Figure 4-39 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1120 MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Figure 4-40 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame 4-172
Figure 4-41 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1190/1190R Main Distribution Frame
4-176
Figure 4-42 Illustration of USB cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
Figure 4-43 Illustration of USB cable connection on HiPath 1190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Figure 4-44 Diagram of power supply configuration for the HiPath1150/1190/1190R Sys-
tems 4-183
Figure 4-45 Protection and grounding connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
Figure 4-46 Connections for telephone jacks (for Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
Figure 4-47 optiPoint Master/Slave telephone HiPath 1120 connections. . . . . . . . . 4-188
Figure 5-1 Profiset 3030 System telephone layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-193
Figure 5-2 E822 ST system telephone layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194
Figure 5-3 E821 ST system telephone layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195
Figure 5-4 optiPoint 500 advance System telephone layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-196
Figure 5-5 optiPoint 500 economy/basic/standard system telephone layout . . . . . 5-197
Figure 5-6 optiPoint 500 entry System Telephone Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-198
Figure 5-7 optiPoint 500 rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-199
Figure 7-1 Communication Server Properties - Configuring a V.24 Serial Interface 7-282
Figure 7-2 Possible USB Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-283
Figure 7-3 Communication Server Properties - Configuring a USB Connection . . 7-284
Figure 7-4 Properties of the CommServer - Connections ADSL module . . . . . . . . 7-286
Figure 7-5 Possible optiPoint Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-287
Figure 7-6 CommServer Properties - optiPoint Connection Configuration . . . . . . . 7-289
Figure 7-7 CommServer Properties - optiPoint CAPI Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-289
Figure 7-8 External analog modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-290
Figure 7-9 HiPath 1100 Manager Configuration - Analog modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-291
Figure 7-10 CommServer Configuration - Remote Analog modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-292
Figure 7-11 ISDN Configuration options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-294
Figure 7-12 CommServer Properties - Configuration of ISDN connections . . . . . . . 7-295
Figure 7-13 Installation Setup - USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-296
Service Manual 11
Figures
Figure 7-14 Installation Setup - USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-297

Figure 7-15 Windows 98 SE - USB Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-298
Figure 7-16 Windows 98 SE - USB drivers installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-299
Figure 7-17 Windows 98 SE - selection for ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-300
Figure 7-18 Windows 98 SE - MSN Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-300
Figure 7-19 Windows ME - Specify installation folder.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-301
Figure 7-20 Windows ME - USB/CAPI installation location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-302
Figure 7-21 Windows ME - selection for ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-303
Figure 7-22 Windows SE - MSN Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-303
Figure 7-23 Windows 2000 - Driver location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-304
Figure 7-26 Windows 2000 - ISDN selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-306
Figure 7-27 Windows 2000 - MSN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-306
Figure 7-29 Windows 2003 - Drivers installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-308
Figure 7-30 Windows 2003 - ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-308
Figure 7-32 Windows XP - Driver location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-310
Figure 7-33 Windows XP - Driver installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-311
Figure 7-34 Windows XP - ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-311
Figure 7-35 Windows XP - MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-312
Figure 7-38 Windows 98 SE - selection for ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-318
Figure 7-39 Windows 98 SE - MSN Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-319
Figure 7-40 Windows ME - Specify installation folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-320
Figure 7-41 Windows ME - Specify installation folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-320
Figure 7-42 Windows ME - selection for ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-321
Figure 7-43 Windows SE - MSN Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-322
Figure 7-47 Windows 2000 - ISDN selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-325
Figure 7-51 Windows 2003 - ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-327
Figure 7-55 Windows XP - ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-330
Figure 7-56 Windows XP - MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-330
Figure 7-57 SNMP folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-335
12 Service Manual
Figures
Figure 7-58 SW Router ADSL firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-337

Figure 7-59 ADSL router configuration SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-338
Figure 7-60 Configuring the ADSL via web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-339
Figure 7-61 Password and Username window for access via web browser. . . . . . . 7-340
Figure 7-62 Changing the default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-340
Figure 7-63 Changing the default IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-341
Figure 7-64 Default factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-342
Figure 7-65 Selecting a Firmware file for Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-343
Figure 7-66 Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-344
Figure 7-67 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-345
Figure 7-68 Login to the Speed Stream Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-345
Figure 7-69 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-346
Figure 7-70 Returning to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-347
Figure 7-71 Access to COMGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-348
Figure 7-72 CommServer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-349
Figure 7-73 Communication Server Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-350
Figure 7-74 LCR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-355
Figure 7-75 LCR module - regional configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-356
Figure 7-76 LCR module - creating tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-357
Figure 7-77 LCR module - configuring a rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-358
Figure 7-78 LCR module - example of a rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-359
Figure 7-79 LCR module - time interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-360
Figure 7-80 LCR module - GSM/SIP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-361
Service Manual 13
Figures
14 Service Manual
Tables
Tables 0
Table 2-1 Specific limitations to system expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Table 2-2 Considerations on S0 digital lines on the HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Table 2-3 Considerations on S0 digital lines on the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Table 2-4 Considerations on TME1 digital lines on the HiPath 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Table 2-5 Considerations on TME1 digital lines on the HiPath 1190 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Table 2-6 optiPoint and KS telephones for HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Table 2-7 optiPoint and KS telephones for HiPath1150/1190/1190R. . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Table 2-8 Examples of system configurations HiPath 1190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Table 2-9 Distribution of modules on the HiPath 1190 backplanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Table 2-10 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Table 2-11 Standards and compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Table 2-12 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Table 2-13 Documentation list for HiPath 1100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Table 3-1 Abbreviations for Country names: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Table 3-2 List of modules/components - HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Table 3-3 List of modules/components - HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Table 3-4 HiPath 1120 MB Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Table 3-5 Baby Board VCC module Connectors HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Table 3-6 HiPath 1150 Motherboard Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Table 3-7 HiPath 1190 Motherboard Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Table 3-8 EB 200 Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Table 3-9 EB 204 Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Table 3-10 Connector assignments for modules EB 210, EB 206 and EB 202 . . . . 3-62
Table 3-11 EB 012 and EB 010 Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Table 3-12 EB 800, EB 400 and EB 200 Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Table 3-13 Module S0 HiPath1150/1190/1190Rjumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Table 3-14 S0 module Connectors for HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Table 3-15 Installing an S0 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Table 3-16 TME1 module Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Table 3-17 TME1 module Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Table 3-18 TME1 module, DIP Switch 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Table 3-19 TME1 module, DIP Switch 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Table 3-20 TME1 module display readings (CAS access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Table 3-21 Display indications of TME1 module (S2 access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Table 3-22 UP0/E module Connectors HiPath 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Table 3-23 UP0/E module Connector assignments HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . 3-79
Table 3-24 HiPath 1120 ADSL module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Table 3-25 HiPath1150/1190/1190R ADSL module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Table 3-26 Connectors of the SLIMC and SDASLIM module HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . 3-85
Service Manual 15
Tables
Table 3-27 Connectors of the LIMC and ADSLIM module HiPath1150/1190/1190R . 3-86
Table 3-28 Baby Board ADSL Connectors HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . 3-88
Table 3-29 EVM HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R module Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Table 3-30 CD 16 module Connector assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Table 3-31 Music module Connector assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Table 3-32 Electrical requirements for sensors and relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Table 3-33 PSU Connector assignments HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Table 3-34 PSU Connector assignments for HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Table 3-35 Batteries - technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Table 3-36 Examples of the working period of the batteries in the HiPath 1150 . . . 3-100
Table 3-37 Examples of the working period of the batteries in the HiPath 1190 . . . 3-100
Table 3-38 HiPath 1190/1190R backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Table 3-39 Attribution of TFE-S contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Table 3-40 V.24 adapter cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Table 3-41 USB adapter cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Table 3-42 TME1 serial cable signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Table 3-43 Serial cable to modem signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Table 3-44 TME1 coax cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Table 3-45 TME1 coax cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Table 3-46 Technical data of the balun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Table 3-47 Technical data of the battery interconnect cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Table 4-1 HiPath 1100 - Equipment installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Table 4-2 Slot / type of module for the HiPath 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Table 4-3 Slot / type of module on HiPath 1190/1190R systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Table 4-4 Example of the location of extensions on the HiPath 1120 Main Distribution
Frame 4-171
Table 4-5 Example of extension locations on the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame .
4-175
Table 4-6 Example of extension locations on the Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . 4-175
Table 4-7 Color code for cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
Table 4-8 Visual inspection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
Table 5-1 Terminals, adapters and accessories for optiPoint 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-202
Table 6-1 Configuration procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205
Table 6-2 Detection sequence of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205
Table 6-3 Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206
Table 6-4 Classification of programming tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207
Table 6-5 Main Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209
Table 6-6 External line settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211
Table 6-7 Programming an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-216
Table 6-8 Default settings for EWACO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218
Table 6-9 DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218
Table 6-10 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-221
Table 6-11 Lists of Emergency Numbers (040) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-221
Table 6-12 Updating the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222
16 Service Manual
Tables
Table 6-13 Remote administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223

Table 6-14 Internal entrance telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223
Table 6-15 Call detail recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-224
Table 6-16 Country/Group of Countries (165) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226
Table 6-17 Analog CLIP Protocol (005). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226
Table 6-18 Fax/DID Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227
Table 6-19 EVM module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-229
Table 6-20 Digital trunk settings0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-231
Table 6-21 CAC Code (012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-232
Table 6-22 LAN interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-232
Table 6-23 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-233
Table 6-24 CD Interface Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-248
Table 6-25 CDR Header Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-265
Table 9-1 Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-382
Service Manual 17
Safety Information
1 Important Information
HiPath 1100 Telecommunications Systems are compatible with TN-S and TN-C-S power
systems featuring a PEN conductor divided into two parts: a safety ground conductor (PE) and
a neutral conductor (N) as defined in IEC 364-3.
Warning
! Only service and installation personnel should open the PABX box and/or connect
and handle trunk and extension lines.
1.1 Safety Information

The following information is intended for service personnel and authorized technicians.
Read carefully all the information pertaining to this equipment and follow all safety guidelines.
Become familiar with all emergency numbers.
Whenever work conditions are not absolutely safe, make sure to discuss the situation with a
supervisor before starting to work. For example, humidity or risk of an explosion due to the
presence of gas should be talked about before proceeding.
Safety Symbols
The following symbols are used to indicate potential hazards
:
This symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

! Danger not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

! Warning not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which may

! Caution lead to a minor to moderate injury or may damage the hardware or
software.
This symbol identifies useful information.
1-18 Service Manual

Safety Information
Other symbols that indicate potential hazardous situations

Most of these symbols do not appear in this manual but may appear on the equipment.
Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser

*Electrostatically Sensitive Device
1.1.1 Safety Information: danger
Ground Safety
Ensure that all proper ground connections have been made before operating the system.
Never operate the equipment before connecting the ground wire.
Dangerous Voltages
Voltages higher than 30 VAC (alternating current) or 42 VDC (direct current) are classified as
dangerous voltages (EN 60950).
Damage
Replace the power cord immediately if there is any sign of damage.
Replace any damaged safety equipment immediately (covers, labels, safety cables).
Use Siemens-approved cables and modules only. The use of accessories that are not
recommended for the system may cause it to malfunction.
Make sure power is turned off while equipment is being serviced.

When maintenance services require shutting down the system, make sure to disconnect all
power supplies.
Working on low voltage network circuits

Only qualified technical personnel should work on low voltage network systems (100-
240 V ac).
Never work alone when working with high voltage circuits. Make sure there is another
person present who knows the location of the circuit breakers.
Never touch live wires that are not properly insulated.
Ensure that no other power source is connected to the equipment. Make sure that the
power source being used is protected by means of an additional breaker or fuse.
Service Manual 1-19

Safety Information
Make sure that no circuit is powered up before you start working on the equipment. Never
assume that all circuits are automatically disconnected every time a breaker or additional
fuse is disconnected.
Do not connect or remove telephone lines or circuit boards during a thunderstorm.
Always consider the possibility that a leakage current may be present.
When working outdoors, never leave the equipment unsupervised.
1.1.2 Safety Information: warning
Hazards when working with large gauge cables

Low voltages and large gauge cables increase the risk of hazardous situations. While large
gauge cables are usually of low voltage, their current values are higher. This results in higher
risk, specifically in the event of a short-circuit.
Protective Clothing/Equipment
When working with the equipment, do not wear loose-fitting clothes. Contain long or free-
flowing hair.
To avoid injury and the risk of short-circuiting, do not wear jewelry, watches with metallic
wristbands, clothing with metallic accessories or rivets when working with the equipment.
Always use appropriate eye protection.
Wear a safety helmet in hazardous situations where there is a risk of injury from falling
objects.
Safety Measures
Shiny or reflective surfaces are conductive. Never touch a live component with a mirror.
This can lead to short-circuiting, which may lead to personal injury.
Unless the equipments operating instructions specify otherwise, shut-down the power
when working in close proximity to a power supply or DC converter.
Do not try to lift heavy objects by yourself.
1-20 Service Manual

Safety Information
1.1.3 Safety Information: Caution
Checking and Measuring Voltage

Check rated voltage for recommended system installation.
Proceed very carefully when making measurements on live components or when servicing
equipment with the power on.
Main Circuit Breaker

Know the location of the systems main circuit breaker and its conductive capacity. Check this
information against the exchange specifications in Technical Data on page 2-38 to assess
compatibility.
Damage
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not operate equipment that is
damaged. Report any problems to your supervisor.
ESD Protection for Components (ESD)

To protect an electrostatically sensitive device:
Wear an anti-static wristband before servicing or maintaining the system or any of its
modules.
Always transport the system or its modules in appropriate protective packaging.
When working with boards, always place them on a grounded conductive base.
Use grounded soldering irons with only.
Layout of the Cables

Position cables in a manner to prevent damaging them or causing accidents and injuring
people.
Batteries
Batteries that are not correctly installed or batteries replaced with a different type than the one
specified can be an explosion hazard. Replace battery with an identical type of battery or use
a type recommended by Technical Support. Dispose of used batteries according to your
countries laws and regulations.
Service Manual 1-21

Safety Information
1.1.4 General Information
Line/Cable Connections
All cables coming out of the system must be protected along their entire path inside
conduits, ducts or other appropriate routes of conveyance.
Cables must be connected only to their specified connections points.
Location of Safety Equipment

Once maintenance is finished, return all safety equipment to its proper location.
Inspecting your Tools

Inspect tools regularly. Only tools in perfect condition should be used.
Condensation
When moving the equipment from a cold environment to a location at room temperature, take
into consideration Environmental conditions on page 2-40 to prevent the occurrence of
condensation. Wait until the equipment is at room temperature and completely dry before
turning it on.
Wall Mounting
Some types of walls (e.g., drywall) have limited weight-bearing capacity. Before installing
equipment in wall-mount configuration, make sure the wall can support the weight.
Examine the condition of the walls to ensure that there are no cracks or damage that
indicates the presence of humidity.
Flammable Materials
Do not store flammable materials in close proximity to the equipment.
Hazards at the location of operation

Ensure that the location is well lit.
There is a higher risk of an accident occurring in or near unorganized premises.
1-22 Service Manual

Safety Information
1.1.5 What to do in Case of an Emergency
Procedures to follow during Accidents

In the event of an accident stay calm and proceed with caution.
Turn off the power before touching the victim of an electrical accident.
If the power cannot be shut down immediately, use an object made of a non-conductive
material such as wood to touch the victim and isolate him/her from any electrical current.
First Aid
You should have knowledge of the first aid principles to follow for victims of electric shock.
In the event of an emergency of this kind, it is critical to know CPR in order to help victims
who have suffered cardiac arrest or who have stopped breathing. It is also essential to have
basic knowledge of the kind of first aid administered to burn victims.
If the victim is not breathing, perform mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose resuscitation
immediately.
If you have had proper training and the victims heart is not beating, promptly commence
a heart massage.
Emergency Call
Call an ambulance or doctor immediately and provide the following information calmly and
rationally:
Where did the accident occur?
What happened?
What type of injuries were sustained?
Finally, be ready to provide any additional information needed for rendering emergency
services.
1.1.6 Accident Report

Promptly report to a supervisor all accidents, near-accidents and potential hazards.
Report all electrical shocks, even minor ones.
Service Manual 1-23

Data Protection and Confidentiality
1.2 Data Protection and Confidentiality
Handling of Personal Information

This telephone exchange uses and processes personal information (call detail records, display
messages, and customer data records, for instance).
Comply with all local and country-specific laws and regulations concerning use and protection
of such information.
Information Protection laws are designed to prevent violation of individual privacy rights through
misuse of personal data.
By safeguarding data against misuse during all stages of processing, information protection
laws protects your rights as well as those of third parties
Guidelines for Siemens Employees

Siemens company policy and procedures require secure business practices and employee
data confidentiality.
The following rules must be strictly followed in order to ensure compliance with job-related
statutory requirements (be they company functions or outsourced maintenance and
management). This serves to safeguard our customers interests and provide additional
personal protection.
Guidelines for Handling Information

A conscientious, responsible approach helps to protect and safeguard information:
Make sure that only authorized personnel have access to customer information.
Always use password assignment features; no exceptions allowed. Never disclose
passwords to unauthorized personnel.
Ensure that no unauthorized personnel are able to process (store, modify, transmit,
override, delete) or make use of customer information.
Block all access by unauthorized personnel to data such as backup disks or record
printouts.
See that all unnecessary recording media are completely destroyed and that no
documents are stored or left in unsecured places.
Working together with the customer builds trust.
1-24 Service Manual

Structure of this Service Manual
1.3 Structure of this Service Manual
Introduction
This manual provides information about the HiPath 1100 Communications Systems.
This manual was designed to provide information in information mapping format. It is divided
into sections and units that present, as clearly as possible, all steps required to perform specific
tasks when operating the system. It makes it easy for technical personnel to find the information
needed and learn it quickly.
Main sections of this Manual.

Chapter 2, System Data provides a description of the HiPath 1100 system, technical
information, and a list of relevant documentation.
Chapter 3, Modules describes all the modules that comprise the HiPath 1100 system as
well as their characteristics.
Chapter 4, Installation provides information on how to setup and install the HiPath 1100,
including recommendations and important notes.
Chapter 5, Telephones describes Standard and System Telephones.
Chapter 7, Operation describes the procedures for starting up the HiPath 1100.
Chapter 6, Configuring the system specifically for the client lists all programming codes
and their functions.
Chapter 8, Feature access codes contains a summarized table of all the features of the
HiPath 1100 system.
Service Manual 1-25

System Data
Overview
2 System Data
2.1 Overview
This manual describes the HiPath 1100 systems and their characteristics. Read all the
chapters in this manual carefully. Only trained technical personnel should handle and service
this system.
About this chapter

This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic Page
Introduction 2-26
Configurations 2-27
System Periphery 2-28
System expansion limitations 2-30
Technical Data 2-38
Technical Standards and Compliance 2-39
Documentation List 2-41
2.2 Introduction
Power Systems
The HiPath 1150/1190 systems are designed to connect to TN-S and TN-C-S-type power
systems that feature a PEN conductor divided in two: a ground or protective earth conductor
(PE) and a neutral conductor (N).
Warning
! However, in both cases the shields for extensions and external lines must have a
separate ground connection ( 10 )
These HiPath 1100 systems are designed for residential, private or commercial use. Additional
safety measures to prevent external interference may be required in industrial environments
(For additional information see Environmental Conditions,item 2.7.2).
2-26 Service Manual

System Data
Configurations HiPath 1100
2.3 Configurations HiPath 1100

The systems HiPath 1100 are designed to meet the requirements for a wide range of clients
and are offered in the following configurations:
HiPath 1120: Wallmount, standard configuration for 2 external lines, 8 extensions and 4
system telephone interfaces (KS).
HiPath 1150: Wallmount, standard configuration for 2 external lines, 10 extensions and 8
system telephone interfaces (KS).
The HiPath 1190 comes in two versions:
HiPath 1190: with external cabinet accommodating up to 21 modules (expansion and
optional) comprising the MB, 2 backplanes, 3 power supplies (UPS).
HiPath 1190R: with rack-mounting cabinet on a standard 19 rack, can accommodate
up to 21 modules (expansion and optional) in addition to the CPU, comprising the MB,
2 backplanes, 3 power supplies (UPS).
For information about country-specific versions please ask one of our distributors.
Figure 2-1 System Overview
Service Manual 2-27

System Data
HiPath 1100 System Periphery
2.4 HiPath 1100 System Periphery

HiPath 1120
C/D
System Telephones 4x Service PC
MO
A/B
Mini DIN-6 V.24 Printer
External analog lines 2x MB
A/B
Analog extensions 8x Mini DIN-4 MO Service PC
USB
Sensor and Relay Music mod- ADSL
S1 / RL1 Ethernet HUB - 4 PC Ports
Audio Device ule MO MO LAN
Entrance tele- UP0/E
Internal entrance telephone interface EB optiPoint tele-
phone Extension MO
204 and
A/B
External analog lines
ISDN S 200 Analog extensions
Basic Access 0
S0 EB EVM
(Public Network)
CTR-UP0/E MO
EB
Figure 2-2 HiPath 1120 Periphery
HiPath 1150
System Telephones C/D Service PC

8x Mini DIN-6 MO
External analog lines A/B V.24 Printer
2x MB
Analog extensions A/B
10 x MO Service PC
MOH Mini DIN-4 USB
External music source
Music
HUB - 4 PC Ports
Primary Access E1 TME1 ADSL Ethernet
(Public Network) EB MO LAN
Entrance UP0/E optiPoint telephones

Internal entrance tele- telephone EB
phone Extension interface 010, 202,
S0 S 0 206, 210,
Basic Access A/B External analog lines
ISDN EB 012, 200,
(Public Network) Analog extensions
400, 800
EVM EB
MO
CTR-UP0/E
EB
2-28 Service Manual

System Data
HiPath 1100 System Periphery
HiPath 1190
C/D MO Service PC
System telephones 8x Mini DIN-6 V.24 Printer
MB
External music source MOH Music Mini DIN-4 MO Service PC
USB
System C/D CD 16
MO ADSL Ethernet HUB - 4 PC Ports
telephones
MO LAN
Primary Access E1 TME1 UP0/E
(Public Network) EB optiPoint tele-
EB
phones
S0
S 0
Basic Access 010, 202,
ISDN EB
(Public Network) 206, 210,
a/b External analog lines
Entrance 012, 200,
Entrance tele- Analog extensions
telephone 400, 800
phone Extension EB
interface
EVM CTR-UP0/E
MO EB
Service Manual 2-29

System Data
System expansion limitations
2.5 System expansion limitations

During system installation (see Installing modules on page 4-138) please consider
characteristics, recommendations and limitations of the modules that will comprise the final set.
We therefore recommend that you read this chapter carefully, where you will find the maximum
capacities of each module and how it interacts with the other components.
Basic configuration: HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

External analog lines 2 0
Analog extensions 8 10
System telephone 4 8
interface (KS)*
Expansion modules:
EB 010 (10 extensions) 0 4 14
EB 012 (12 extensions) 0 3 11
EB 202 (2 external lines and 2 extensions) 0 4 16
EB 204 (2 external lines and 4 extensions) 2 0
EB 206 (2 external lines and 6 extensions) 0 4 16
EB 210 (2 external lines and 10 0 4 11
extensions)
EB 200 (2 external lines) 2 4 16
S0 module 1 2
TME1 module 0 1 2
UP0/E module (optiPoint): 1 1 or 2
(see CTR-UP0/E module on
page 3-79)
CD 16 module (KS) 0 1
Optional modules:**
LAN interface modules 1
(ADSL, SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC or
ADSLIM)
EVM module 1
Music module 1 on board
TFE entrance telephone interface 20
Total System Capacity:***:
2-30 Service Manual

System Data
Extension (analog + digital) 23 89 143

System Telephones (KS + optiPoint) 2KS 8 KS 8 KS
+ + +
(see CTR-UP0/E module on page 3-79) 8 optiPoint 16 optiPoint 16 optiPoint
(4 master + 4 (8 master + 8 (8 master + 8
slave) slave) slave)
or or
4KS 24 KS (CD 16
module)
Digital line with TME1/Digital line with S0 0/2 30/10 45/20
External analog lines without TME1 or S0 6 16 40
modules
Digital line (TME1) + analog line/digital line 0/8 32/16 45/44
(S0)+ analog line
* Each system telephone (KS) that is connected occupies one analog telephone slot.
** S0 and TME1 modules cannot be used simultaneously.
LAN and TME1 interface modules can be used simultaneously in HiPath 1150/1190.
- HiPath 1120 : ADSL modules, SLIMC and SADSLIM module
- HiPath 1150/1190 :ADSL modules, SLIMC and SADSLIM module
*** When the maximum capacity for external lines is exceeded due to the installation of EB, S0 or TME1 modules, the system
disables external analog lines. Extension slots, however, continue to operate as usual.
Example 1: HiPath 1150
- slot 0, MB 210,
- slot 1, EB 210,
- slot 3 TME1 - 30 digital lines
EB 210 external lines will not work, but extensions will. Since the system allows for a maximum number of 32 lines, we
cannot have any additional analog line.
- slot 0, MB 210
- slot 3 TME1 = 30 digital lines
In this case, there are 32 external lines at most available on the system. This means there is no room for an additional EB
module with an external analog line.
30 CAS/S2 digital lines + 2 MB external analog lines = 32 external lines.
If an EB 200 was installed in slot 1 or slot 2 the module would not be operable, since it would exceed the systems
maximum capacity for external lines.
- slot 0, MB 210
- slot 3 TME1 = 10 digital lines
(WARNING: Deactivate digital line for the TME1 module and program unused digital lines on the switch as unavailable
(turn the switch off then on).
Overall, there are 12 external lines on the system. This means there are 4 additional external lines available before
reaching the maximum capacity of 16 external lines.
An additional EB 400 could be used in slot 1 or slot 2.
If an EB 800 were installed on the switch, the entire module would be inoperable since it would exceed the systems
maximum capacity for external lines.
Table 2-1 Specific limitations to system expansion
Service Manual 2-31

System Data
2.5.1 Considerations for digital lines

HiPath 1120
Maximum number of external lines allowed is 16 (S0 digital lines + external analog lines)
Settings External analog line S0 module digital line Total

MB + 1 EB 200 4 0 4
MB + 1 S0-2 2 4 6
MB + 1 S0-2 + 1 EB 200 4 4 8
Table 2-2 Considerations on S0 digital lines on the HiPath 1120
HiPath 1150
Maximum number of external lines allowed is 16 (S0 digital lines + external analog lines)
2-32 Service Manual

System Data
Settings External analog line S0 module digital line Total

MB + 1 EB 800 10 0 10
MB + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 + 1 EB 200 16 0 16
MB + 1 S0-2 2 4 6
MB + 1 S0-2 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 12 4 16
MB + 1 S0-5 2 10 12
MB + 1 S0-5 + 1 EB 400 6 10 16
Table 2-3 Considerations on S0 digital lines on the HiPath 1150
Capacity can be increased up to 32 external lines using a TME1 module (30 digital lines + 2
analog lines). In this case, an S0 module cannot be used. If 15 (or more) TME1 module
channels are occupied, then only 2 MB external analog lines may be used (e.g., 20 TME1
module digital lines + 2 MB external analog lines).
Settings External Digital line (maximum Total

analog line depending on the number of
analog lines)
MB + 1 TME1 2 30 32
MB + 1 TME1 + 1 EB 200 4 13 17
MB + 1 TME1 + 1 EB 400 6 11 17
MB + 1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 10 7 17
MB + 1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 12 5 17
MB + 1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 14 3 17
Table 2-4 Considerations on TME1 digital lines on the HiPath 1150
HiPath 1190
Maximum number of external lines allowed is 45 (digital lines and/or external analog lines).
Maximum number of external analog lines is 40.
For example, the following configurations are available.
Configuration 1: 40 analog lines + 5 digital lines
Settings External Digital line (depending on the Total

analog line number of analog lines)
1 TME1 0 30 30
2 TME1 0 45 45
1 TME1 + 1 EB 200 2 30 32
2 TME1 + 1 EB 200 2 43 45
1 TME1 + 1 EB 400 4 30 34
2 TME1 + 1 EB 400 4 41 45
Service Manual 2-33

System Data
1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 8 30 38
2 TME1 + 1 EB 800 8 37 45
1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 10 30 40
2 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 10 35 45
1 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 12 30 42
2 TME1 + 1 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 12 33 45
1 TME1 + 2 EB 800 16 29 45
2 TME1 + 2 EB 800 16 29 45
1 TME1 + 2 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 18 27 45
2 TME1 + 2 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 18 27 45
1 TME1 + 2 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 20 25 45
2 TME1 + 2 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 20 25 45
1 TME1 + 3 EB 800 24 21 45
2 TME1 + 3 EB 800 24 21 45
1 TME1 + 3 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 26 19 45
2 TME1 + 3 EB 800 + 1 EB 200 26 19 45
1 TME1 + 3 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 28 17 45
2 TME1 + 3 EB 800 + 1 EB 400 28 17 45
1 TME1 + 4 EB 800 32 13 45
2 TME1 + 4 EB 800 32 13 45
1 TME1 + 5 EB 800 40 5 45
2 TME1 + 5 EB 800 40 5 45
1 TME1 + 10 EB 400 40 5 45
2 TME1 + 10 EB 400 40 5 45
Table 2-5 Considerations on TME1 digital lines on the HiPath 1190
2.5.2 Considerations on system telephones
HiPath 1120
The table below shows the settings available for KS phones and optiPoint using UP0/E MODULES:
Master/Slave/KS
None UP0/E (2 Ports) UP0/E (4 Ports)
0/0/4 2/2/2 4/4/2
Table 2-6 optiPoint and KS telephones for HiPath 1120.
Limitations:
The limit for KS telephones operating with optiPoint telephones in the system is 2 (KS).
2-34 Service Manual

System Data
HiPath 1150/1190
The table below shows the settings available for KS with optiPoint using UP0/E MODULES:
Master/Slave/KS
None UP0/E (2 Ports) UP0/E (4 Ports) UP0/E (8 Ports)
None 0/0/8 2/2/8 4/4/8 8/8/8
UP0/E (2 Ports) 2/2/8 4/4/8 6/6/8 2/2/8
UP0/E (4 Ports) 4/4/8 6/6/8 8/8/8 4/4/8
UP0/E (8 Ports) 8/8/8 8/8/8 8/8/8 8/8/8
Table 2-7 optiPoint and KS telephones for HiPath1150/1190/1190R.
Limitations:
If an 8-port UP0/E module is installed, the system will not free up another UP0/E module in the
system. Both the HiPath 1150 and the HiPath 1190 allow a maximum of 8 UP0/E ports, resulting
in 16 optiPoint telephones (master + slave) + 8 KS telephones, for a total limit of 24 system
telephones. Therefore, only combinations of UP0/E modules are possible for a maximum of 8
ports.
2.5.3 Notes on HiPath 1150

If there are only 2 PCM highways in the HiPath 1150 and one module TME1 is used, we would
have 30 timeslots reserved and a further 2 timeslots reserved for the analog trunks, which
would mean fewer than 32 timeslots free for all the other extensions of the system. To avoid this
limitation, the solution was to use an additional highway based on the DSP control for slots 3
and 4.
SLOT 2 SLOT 4
SLOT 1 SLOT 3
Highway A
Highway B
Highway C
Figure 2-5 Distribution of the highways in the HiPath 1150
Service Manual 2-35

System Data
PCMs are first allocated by connecting a codec in a channel and then letting the DSP transfer
this channel to another. The codec can only be connected in 2 highways, and so to interlink the
codecs with the third highway (c) it is necessary to proceed as with the first highway. The
highway (A) will not be used in this case.
The HiPath 1150 works with the dynamic allocation of timeslots during system start-up except
for some fixed resources, such as: EVM.
2.5.4 Notes on HiPath 1190

The HiPath 1190 single rack system supports up to 80 extensions
TME 1 module
This must only be mounted in slots 1 and 11. The system must therefore have both racks
mounted in order to run two modules.
Within the maximum limit of 40 external analog lines or 45 digital lines and 140 extensions,
the system may consist of, for example:
Slot Modules
1 and 2 2 x EB 800, 2 x EB 012 or 2 x EB 210 or 1 x TME1 in slot 1 (in this case slot 2
must remain Free).
3, 4 and 14 The module configuration for extensions or external lines must not exceed 32
ports (e.g., 3 x EB 010 or 2 x EB 012 or 2 x EB 210).
ports.
ports.
11, 12 and Module configuration for extensions or external lines must not exceed 32 ports,
13 or 1 x TME1 in slot 11 and 1 x EB 010, EB 012 or EB 210 in slot 13 (in this case,
slot 12 must be left Free).
15, 16 and The module configuration for extensions or external lines must not exceed 32
17 ports.
18, 19 and The module configuration for extensions or external lines must not exceed 32
20 ports.
Table 2-8 Examples of system configurations HiPath 1190
Each of the systems Highway supports up to 32 ports. For example, Highway 2

(slots 3, 4, and 14) can accommodate two EB 800 and one EB 206, totaling 24 ports.
For Highway 1 (slots 1 and 2), when a TME1 module is placed in slot 1 (totaling 30
ports), slot 2 must remain free (except for a LAN interface module, which can be in-
stalled in slot 2).
2-36 Service Manual

System Data
Table 2-9 shows the slots and their Highways.
Slot 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Highways
2 X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X
Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Highways
1 X X
2 X X
3 X X X
4 X X X
Table 2-9 Distribution of modules on the HiPath 1190 backplanes
Service Manual 2-37

System Data
Technical Data
2.6 Technical Data
Element HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

Standard Cabinet Size
Length 360 mm (14.17") 470 mm 420 mm
(18.50") (16.53")
Depth 288 mm (11.33") 14.17" (370 394 mm
mm) (15.51")
Height 64.4 mm (2.53") 100 mm (3.93") 498 mm
(19.60")
Weight 1.2 kg (2.64 lb) 4.25 kg (2.64 22.5 kg (49.60
lb) lb)
Electrical specifications for power supply units (PSUs)
Power Requirements (Input) 220V / 127mA
127V / 331mA 110 - 230V, Full range / 1.5A
110V / 381mA
Operating Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Rated Voltage (Output) U1: 8 Vrms 5.1 VDC .
U2: 23 Vrms 26.4 VDC .
Call Voltage U3:
40 Vrms/60Hz 50 VAC + 97 VDC / 0.13A - 25Hz
65 Vrms/25Hz (SPA) 42 VAC + 85.8 VDC / 0.13A - 25Hz
42 Vrms/25Hz (RSA) (RSA)
Dialing modes for calls to other public or private exchanges:

MF Transmission Level:
Lower Group* -11 dBm
Higher Group* -9 dBm
Pre-Emphasis 2 dB
Pulse Duration** 90ms min.
Inter-digit pause** 90ms min.
DP (Dial Pulse):
Pulse/Pause Ratio** 2:1 (approximately 70:30ms = 10 Hz)
Inter-digit Pause** 800ms
2-38 Service Manual

System Data
Technical standards and compliance
Element HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

Open loop isolation
resistance between A/B or a/ > 10M
ground or b/ground
Closed loop line resistance/
Complies with national requirements/standards
continuous loop current
Incoming Call Detection > 9VRMS
* Values vary according to the country. The values shown are specifically for Brazil.
** Values depend on the country settings, which are configurable. The values shown are default values for Brazil.
Table 2-10 Technical Data
Values shown are approximate. When making connections, consider the specific
level of tolerance that applies.
2.7 Technical standards and compliance
Compliance Standard Note

EN60950
Electrical Safety IEC 60950
UL 60950-1
Environmental Conditions IEC 721 *
IEC61000-4-5
Power Surge (IEC 801-5) Level 3
TIA-968-A
IEC61000-4-4
Fast Transients Level 3
(IEC 801-4)
IEC61000-4-2 Air - Level 3 (8kV)
Static electricity discharge
(IEC 801-2) Contact - Level 2 (4kV)
* Weather conditions: Operation 3K3 Transportation 2K4 Storage 1K3.
Mechanical: Operation 3M3 Transportation 2M2 Storage 1M2.
Table 2-11 Standards and compliance
Service Manual 2-39

System Data
Technical standards and compliance
2.7.1 International Safety Standard

IEC 60950
2.7.2 Environmental conditions
Operation Transportation Storage

Air Temperature (theF) +41 to +86 -13 to +158 41 to +113
Relative humidity 5% to 85 % 95% 5% to 95%
Table 2-12 Environmental conditions
Servicing conditions (mechanical)

This system was essentially designed for installation at a fixed location.
Warning
! Tthe avoid condensation when shipping the system in extremely low
temperatures, keep the equipment in its packaging until it reaches room
temperature. Proceed thereafter with the installation (acceptable temperature
range: 7.5C (45.5F)/30 min)
Do not expose the equipment to direct sunlight or place it near any heat sources
(to avoid a localized increase of temperature)
Make sure the installation area is dry. During system operation avoid any
conditions that may cause condensation.
Forced ventilation is not required.
Do not block the natural flow of air around the equipment.
Do not expose the equipment to the weather.
2-40 Service Manual

System Data
Documentation list
2.8 Documentation list

Documentation Order number
Programming manual - DTMF telephones A31003-K1270-U100-*-**19
User Manual - optiPoint 500 system telephone - Adv, Std, A31003-K1270-U101-*-**19
Basic and Econ
User Manual - Profiset 3030 and E822 ST system A31003-K1270-U102-*-**19
telephones
User Manual - DTMF telephones and Pulse telephones A31003-K1270-U103-*-**19
User Manual - optiPoint 500 system telephone - Entry A31003-K1270-U104-*-**19
Quick Reference Guide - DTMF telephones and Pulse A31003-K1270-U105-*-**19
telephones
Quick Reference Guide - optiPoint 500 system telephone - A31003-K1270-U106-*-**19
Entry
Quick Reference Guide - optiPoint 500 system telephone - A31003-K1270-U107-*-**19
Adv, Std, Basic and Econ
Quick Reference Guide - Profiset 3030 and E822ST system A31003-K1270-U108-*-**19
telephones
Attendant Console - optiPoint 500 system telephone - Adv, A31003-K1270-U109-*-**19
Std, Basic, Econ and Entry
Attendant Console - Profiset 3030 and E822 ST system A31003-K1270-U110-*-**19
telephones
Service Manual A31003-K1270-S100-*-**20
Manager A31003-K1270-M100-*-**A9
Options (Brazil)
Interaction Center Smart User Manual A30808-X5226-E175-*-7618
TAC Smart Quick Reference Guide A30808-X5226-V103-*-7619
Table 2-13 Documentation list for HiPath 1100
Service Manual 2-41

System Data
New in HiPath 1100 V7.0
2.9 New in HiPath 1100 V7.0

The table describes the set of new features in V7.0. The data are without requirement on
completeness.
Feature Documentation Order number

Small Hotel Application Operating Instructions -
Extension number changing Programming Manual A31003-K1270-U100-*-**19
through Key phone
Group programming by menu Programming Manual A31003-K1270-U100-*-**19
Executive/secretary function Programming Manual A31003-K1270-U100-*-**19
User Manual optiPoint 500 A31003-K1270-U101-*-**19
2-42 Service Manual

Modules
Overview
3 Modules
3.1 Overview
About this Chapter

Topic Page
Abbreviations for Country names 3-44
List of modules 3-44
Modules/components
Motherboard (MB) 3-50
Expansion modules (EB) 3-58
S0 module 3-66
TME1 module 3-69
UP0/E module and CTR UP0/E module 3-77
Optional modules
LAN interface modules 3-80
EVM module 3-88
CD 16 module 3-90
Music module 3-91
General modules/components
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 3-93
Main Distribution Frame 3-100
Backplane 3-101
Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface 3-103
V.24 Adapter Cable 3-113
USB adapter cable 3-116
TME1 Serial Cable 3-117
Adapter cable for analog modem 3-118
TME1 Coax Cable 3-120
Battery interconnect cables (BBU) 3-122
Service Manual 3-43

Modules
Abbreviations for Country names
3.2 Abbreviations for Country names
BRA Brazil
IM International Market
RSA South Africa
ARG Argentina
SPA Spain
IND India
RUS Russia
UK United Kingdom
AUS Australia
Table 3-1 Abbreviations for Country names:
3.3 List of modules
List of modules/components - HiPath 1120
Module / component Reference

BOX
HiPath 1120 S30817-U857-B401-* (IM) :110V
S30817-U857-A401-* (IM) :220V
S30817-U857-C401-* (ARG)
S30817-U857-A412-* (SPA)
S30817-U857-A464-* (IND)
S30817-U857-A497-* (RSA)
S30817-U857-A408-* (UK)
S30817-U857-A400-* (AUS)
Motherboard (MB)
MB S30817-Q845-A401-* (IM)
S30817-Q845-A464-* (IND)
S30817-Q845-A497-* (RSA)
3-44 Service Manual

Modules
List of modules

Expansion module
EB 204 S30817-H844-A401-* (IM)
S30817-H844-A464-* (IND)
S30817-H844-A497-* (RSA)
EB 200 S30817-H844-B401-* (IM)
S30817-H844-B464-* (IND)
S30817-H844-B497-* (RSA)
S0 module (2 ports) S30817-H843-A301-*
S0 module (1 port) S30817-H843-B301-*
UP0/E module (4 ports) S30817-H863-A401-* (IM)
UP0/E module (2 ports) S30817-H863-B401-* (IM)
CTR UP0/E module S30817-Q862-A401-*
Optional modules (MO)
EVM module S30807-Q6945-X-*
ADSL module S30817-H842-A301-* (IM)
SLIMC module S30817-H866-A401-* (IM)
SADSLIM module S30817-H866-B401-* (IM)
Music module S30817-H860-A301-* (IM)
Internal entrance telephone with TFE See Note 1
interface
General Components
V.24 Adapter Cable S30122-X5468-X005-*
USB adapter cable S30817-K861-A301-*
Impedance adapter (Balun) - TME1 S30122-X7357-X-*
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 110/127V:
S30122-X8009-X100-* (IM)
220V:
S30122-X7646-X-* (IM)
S30122-X7646-X200-* (ARG/AUS)
S30122-X8009-X005-* (SPA/RUS)
S30122-X8009-X006-* (RSA)
S30122-X7646-X300-* (UK)
Interconnect cable (flat cable) - with Ferrite C39195-A7700-B6
Interconnect cable (flat cable) - without C39195-Z7001-C95
Ferrite
Service Manual 3-45

Modules
List of modules

Ferrite for C95 interconnect cable C39022-Z7000-C15
Interconnect cable (flat cable)- UP0/E C39195-Z7001-C96
Additional power supply - UP0/E C39280-Z4-C71
*) Module/component version.
Table 3-2 List of modules/components - HiPath 1120
Note 1: See Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface on page 3-103
TFE entrance telephone interface S30122-K7696-T313-* with an amplifier)
TFE entrance telephone interface S30817-K930-A300-* without an amplifier)
entrance telephone interface, Brazil, S30817-Q936-C282
List of modules/components - HiPath1150/1190/1190R

BOX
HiPath 1150 S30817-U853-A401-* (IM)
S30817-U853-A497-* (RSA)
S30817-U853-A464-* (IND)
S30817-U853-A400-* (AUS)
HiPath 1190 Full (2 shelves)
S30777-U770-A401-* (IM)
S30777-U770-A464-* (IND)
S30777-U770-A400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-A497-* (RSA)
Medium (1 shelf)
S30777-U770-B401-* (IM)
S30777-U770-B464-* (IND)
S30777-U770-B400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-B497-* (RSA)
3-46 Service Manual

Modules
List of modules

HiPath 1190R Full (2 shelves)
S30777-U770-C401-* (IM)
S30777-U770-C464-* (IND)
S30777-U770-C400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-C497-* (RSA)
Medium (1 shelf)
S30777-U770-D401-* (IM)
S30777-U770-D464-* (IND)
S30777-U770-D400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-D497-* (RSA)
Expansion Kit HiPath 1190
Power supplies, cables and backplanes S30777-H770-B497-* (RSA)
S30777-H770-B401-* (IM)
Motherboard (MB) HiPath 1150
MB S30817-Q848-B401-* (IM)
S30817-Q848-B464-* (IND)
S30817-Q848-B497-* (RSA)
MB HiPath 1190
MB S30817-Q856-A401-* (IM)
S30817-Q856-A464-* (IND)
Expansion modules
EB 010 S30817-H858-B301-* (IM)
S30817-H858-B397-* (RSA)
EB 012 (HiPath 1150 only) S30817-H858-A301-* (IM)
S30817-H858-A397-* (RSA)
EB 202 S30817-H847-C301-* (IM)
S30817-H847-C364-* (IND)
S30817-H847-C397-* (RSA)
EB 206 S30817-H847-B301-* (IM)
S30817-H847-B364-* (IND)
S30817-H847-B397-* (RSA)
EB 210 S30817-H847-A301-* (IM)
S30817-H847-A364-* (IND)
S30817-H847-A397-* (RSA)
EB 200 S30817-H850-C301-* (IM)
S30817-H850-C364-* (IND)
S30817-H850-C397-* (RSA)
Service Manual 3-47

Modules
List of modules

EB 400 S30817-H850-B301-* (IM)
S30817-H850-B364-* (IND)
S30817-H850-B397-* (RSA)
EB 800 S30817-H850-A301-* (IM)
S30817-H850-A364-* (IND)
S30817-H850-A397-* (RSA)
S0 module (5 ports) S30817-H851-A301-*
S0 module (2 ports) S30817-H851-B301-*
TME1 module S30817-H846-A282-*
UP0/E module (8 ports) S30817-H864-A401-*
UP0/E module (4 ports) S30817-H864-B401-*
UP0/E module (2 ports) S30817-H864-C401-*
CTR UP0/E MODULE S30817-Q862-A401-*
ADSL module S30817-H849-A282-*
LIMC module S30817-H867-A401-* (IM)
ADSLIM module S30817-H867-B401-* (IM)
EVM module S30817-Q6945-X-*
CD 16 module S30817-H0855-A282-*
Internal entrance telephone with TFE See Note 2
interface
General Components
Coax Cable for TME1 module C39195-A9700-B531-*
TME1 Serial Cable C39195-A9700-B532-*
V.24 Adapter Cable S30122-X5468-X005-*
Impedance adapter (Balun) S30122-X7357-X-*
USB adapter cable S30817-K861-A301-*
Interconnect cable, 250 mm (included with V42405-J1-A159
ADSL module)
Power cable C39195-Z7001-C11
C39195-Z7001-C12
Battery interconnect cable (BBU) L30251-U600-A617
Battery interconnect cable (BBU) C39195-A7700-B11
3-48 Service Manual

Modules
List of modules

Interconnect cable between batteries C39195-A7944-B49
(BBU)
Ferrite for power cable C39022-Z7000-C7
Interconnect cable between PSU-batteries C39195-A7700-B9
(BBU)
Interconnect cable for HiPath 1190 power C39195-A7700-B10
supply (BBU)
Vshare cable for HiPath 1190 (BBU) C39195-A7700-B8
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
HiPath 1150 S30122-K7642-X10-* (IM, AUS and IND)
S30122-K7642-X30-* (RSA)
With BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
S30817-U853-A400-* (B AUS)
S30817-U853-B401-* (IM )
S30817-U853-B464-* (IND)
HiPath 1190 S30122-K7642-X200-* (IM, AUS and IND)
S30122-K7642-X300-* (RSA)
Full with BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
S30777-U770-E400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-E401-* (IM )
S30777-U770-E464-* (IND)
Medium with BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
S30777-U770-F400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-F401-* (IM )
S30777-U770-F464-* (IND)
HiPath 1190R S30122-K7642-X200-* (IM, AUS and IND)
S30122-K7642-X300-* (RSA)
Full with BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
S30777-U770-G400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-G401-* (IM )
S30777-U770-G464-* (IND)
Medium with BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
S30777-U770-H400-* (AUS)
S30777-U770-H401-* (IM )
S30777-U770-H464-* (IND)
Expansion Kit with BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
HiPath 1150 S30817-H853-B401-*
Power supply and cables
Service Manual 3-49

Modules
Motherboard (MB)

HiPath 1190/1190R Full
Power supply and cables S30777-H770-H410-*
Medium
S30777-H770-H420-*
Backplane
HiPath 1150 S30817-Q853-A401-*
HiPath 1190 (backplane 1) S30817-Q854-A401-*
HiPath 1190 (backplane 2) S30817-Q854-B401-*
Table 3-3 List of modules/components - HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Note 1: HiPath 1100 For further details on the systems total capacity see Table 2-1 on page
2-31 Specific limitations to system expansion.
Note 2: See Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface on page 3-103
TFE entrance telephone interface S30122-K7696-T313-*(with an amplifier)
TFE entrance telephone interface S30817-K930-A300-*(without an amplifier)
entrance telephone TFE S30817-Q936-C282-* (Brazil)
Warning
! Before inserting or removing any of the modules on the HiPath 1100, make
sure power is turned off.
3.4 Motherboard (MB)
Introduction
The MB is the main board for the HiPath 1100 system. The MB provides all functions required
for PABX operation.
Functions
CLIP - external calling number identification (service must be provided by local carrier)
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
DTMF generator and detector
Conference circuits
3-50 Service Manual

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
Tone generators
Music source
Memory (software + clients data base)
Digital switch
Signaling
Fax/DID.
Systems date and time.
Note
With backup power from a battery, date and time settings are not lost in the event of a power
outage. Replace this battery with an identical type of battery or use a type recommended by
Technical Support.
Caution
! FAILURE TO REPLACE BATTERY WITH SPECIFIED BATTERY TYPE CAN CAUSE
RISK OF EXPLOSION. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO YOUR
COUNTRYS LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
Service Manual 3-51

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
3.4.1 HiPath 1120
If the UP0/E module is connected on the HiPath 1120 , only 2 CD interfaces will be
! available.
MB Interfaces
Battery
Figure 3-1 HiPath 1120s MB
3-52 Service Manual

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
Motherboard Connector assignments - HiPath 1120
Contact X14 Connector X20 Connector X30 Connector X40 Battery

Connector
1 a1 - trunk 1 a1 - extension 1 a5 - extension 5 C-interface 1 Supplies power
2 b1 - trunk 1 b1 - extension 1 b5 - extension 5 D-interface 1 for maintaining
the systems
3 a2 - trunk 2 a2 - extension 2 a6 - extension 6 C-interface 2 date and time
4 b2 - trunk 2 b2 - extension 2 b6 - extension 6 D-interface 2 settings in the
5 a3 - extension 3 a7 - extension 7 C-interface 3 event of a power
outage.
6 b3 - extension 3 b7 - extension 7 D-interface 3
7 a4 - extension 4 a8 - extension 8 C-interface 4
8 b4 - extension 4 b8 - extension 8 D-interface 4
X1 Connector X2 Connector X50 Connector X60 X70 Connector
Connector
Additional ribbon
Ribbon cable for USB V.24 serial Power Supply
cable for EB-UP0/
modules interface interface Unit (PSU)
E
X90 and X91 X92 Connector X93 Connector X94 X95 Connector
Connector Connector
For a VCC For an EVM CTR UP0/E For Music For LAN
module module module Interface
module
Table 3-4 HiPath 1120 MB Connector assignments
Service Manual 3-53

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
Baby Board VCC module interface

This module is connected on the MB and is an AC/DC converter used in HiPath 1120 V6.0 and
V7.0. Input voltages are 23V AC and the ring voltage, which depends on the country. Output
voltages are: 3.3VDC, 5 VDC, 24VDC, 32VDC and the ring voltage added to the offset voltage.
Figure 3-2 HiPath 1120 Baby Board VCC module
Baby Board VCC module Connector assignments
X1 and X2 Connectors
Connects to MB through a pin Connector
Table 3-5 Baby Board VCC module Connectors HiPath 1120
3-54 Service Manual

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
3.4.2 HiPath 1150
MB Interfaces
Battery
Figure 3-3 Overview of the HiPath 1150 MB
Service Manual 3-55

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
MB Connector assignments (HiPath 1150)
Contact X5 X6 X7 X8 X11 X12

Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector
1 a1 - trunk 1 a3 - a7 - extension -- C-interface 1 C-interface 5
extension 3 7
2 b1 - trunk 1 b3 - b7 - extension -- D-interface 1 D-interface 5
extension 3 7
3 a2 - trunk 2 a4 - a8 - extension Music - A C-interface 2 C-interface 6
extension 4 8 wire
4 b2 - trunk 2 b4 - b8 - extension Music - B D-interface 2 D-interface 6
extension 4 8 wire
5 a1 - extension a5 - a9 - extension C-interface 3 C-interface 7
1 extension 5 9
6 b1 - extension b5 - b9 - extension D-interface 3 D-interface 7
1 extension 5 9
7 a2 - extension a6 - a10 - C-interface 4 C-interface 8
2 extension 6 extension 10
8 b2 - extension b6 - b10 - D-interface 4 D-interface 8
2 extension 6 extension 10
X212 port port X1 X9 X10
V.24 serial
Backplane, Power Backplane CTR-UP0/E Interface
interface
slot 1 and 2 supply (PSU) Slot 3 and 4 module USB
Connector Battery
X31
Supplies power for
maintaining the systems
EVM module date and time settings in the
event of a power outage.
Table 3-6 HiPath 1150 Motherboard Connector assignments
3-56 Service Manual

Modules
Motherboard (MB)
3.4.3 HiPath 1190/1190R
MB Interfaces
Battery
Figure 3-4 Overview of the HiPath 1190 MB
Service Manual 3-57

Modules
Expansion modules (EB)
MB Connector assignments (HiPath 1190)
Contact X16 X17 X8 Connector Battery

Connector Connector
1 C-interface 1 C-interface 5 Music - A wire
Supplies
2 D-interface 1 D-interface 5 Music - B wire power for
3 C-interface 2 C-interface 6 (not used) maintaining
4 D-interface 2 D-interface 6 (not used) the systems
date and time
5 C-interface 3 C-interface 7 settings in the
6 D-interface 3 D-interface 7 event of a
7 C-interface 4 C-interface 8 power outage.
8 D-interface 4 D-interface 8
X1 Connector X9 Connector X31 X14 X213
Connector Connector Connector
V.24 serial
USB Interface CTR-UP0/E
Backplane interface EVM module
module
Table 3-7 HiPath 1190 Motherboard Connector assignments
3.5 Expansion modules (EB)
Introduction
These modules consist of extensions and external analog lines for expanding the number of
analog interfaces (A/B) for standard telephones, analog trunks and additional equipment (TFE
interface, and others).
There are modules with only trunks, trunks and extensions and only extensions. For modules
with trunks and extensions, in the event of a power outage, there is a circuit that switches the
available trunks to their respective slots on the extensions.
3.5.1 HiPath 1120
Limitations
200 - 2 external analog lines
204 - 2 external analog lines and 4 analog extensions.
3-58 Service Manual

Modules
EB 200 Expansion module
Interfaces
Figure 3-5 EB 200 module overview
Figure 3-5 shows the distribution of extensions and external lines associated with the EB 200
module Connectors.
EB 200 Connector assignments
Contact X6 Connector X5 Connector

1 Connects to the a1 - external line 1
2 MB through an b1 - external line 1
interconnect
3 cable (flat cable) a2 - external line 2
4 b2 - external line 2
Table 3-8 EB 200 Connector assignments
Service Manual 3-59

Modules
EB 204 Expansion module
Interfaces
module Connectors.
EB 204 Connector assignments
Contact X1 Connector X2 Connector X5 Connector

1 Connects to the a1 - extension 1 a1 - external line 1
2 MB through an b1 - extension 1 b1 - external line 1
interconnect
3 cable (flat cable) a2 - extension 1 a2 - external line 2
4 b2 - extension 2 b2 - external line 2
5 a3 - extension 3
6 b3 - extension 3
7 a4 - extension 4
8 b4 - extension 4
Table 3-9 EB 204 Connector assignments
3-60 Service Manual

Modules
3.5.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Limitations
210 - 2 external analog lines and 10 analog extensions
012 - 12 analog extensions
010 - 10 analog extensions.
EB 210, EB 206 and EB 202 expansion modules
Interfaces
module Connectors. The distribution associated with the EB 206 and 202 modules is limited by
their capacity.
Service Manual 3-61

Modules
Connector assignments for EB 210, EB 206 and EB 202 modules
Contact X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 X4 Connector

Connector
1 Connection to a1 - external line 1 a3 - a7 - extension
MB through extension 3 7
2 backplane b1 - external line 1 b3 - b7 - extension
Connector extension 3 7
3 a2 - external line 2 a4 - a8 - extension
extension 4 8
4 b2 - external line 2 b4 - b8 - extension
extension 4 8
5 a1 - extension 1 a5 - a9 - extension
extension 5 9
6 b1 - extension 1 b5 - b9 - extension
extension 5 9
7 a2 - extension 2 a6 - a10 -
extension 6 extension 10
8 b2 - extension 2 b6 - b10 -
extension 6 extension 10
Table 3-10 Connector assignments for modules EB 210, EB 206 and EB 202
Note 1: X2 Connector used for EB 210, EB 206, and EB 202 X3 Connector used for EB 210
and EB 206 X4 Connector for EB 210.
3-62 Service Manual

Modules
EB 012 and EB 010 expansion modules
Interfaces
module Connectors. The distribution associated with the EB 010 module is limited by its
capacity.
Service Manual 3-63

Modules
Connector assignments for the EB 012 and EB 010 modules
Contact X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 X4 Connector

Connector
1 Connection to a1 - extension 1 a5 - a9 - extension 9
MB through extension 5
2 backplane b1 - extension 1 b5 - b9 - extension 9
Connector extension 5
3 a2 - extension 2 a6 - a10 - extension 10
extension 6
4 b2 - extension 2 b6 - b10 - extension 10
extension 6
extension 7
extension 7
extension 8
extension 8
Table 3-11 EB 012 and EB 010 Connector assignments
Note 1: X4 Connector uses contacts 5 through 8 on the EB 012 only.
3-64 Service Manual

Modules
EB 800, EB 400 and EB 200 expansion modules
module Connectors. The distribution associated with the EB 400 and EB 200 modules is limited
by their capacity.
Connector assignments for EB 800, EB 400 and EB 200 modules

1 Connection to a1 - external line 1 a5 - external line 5
2 MB through b1 - external line 1 b5 - external line 5
backplane
3 Connector a2 - external line 2 a6 - external line 6
4 b2 - external line 2 b6 - external line 6
5 a3 - external line 3 a7 - external line 7
7 a4 - external line 4 a8 - external line 8
Table 3-12 EB 800, EB 400 and EB 200 Connector assignments
Note 1: Modules EB 800, 400, and 200 do not have circuit breakers for power outages.
X2 Connector used for EB 800, EB 400, and EB 200
X3 Connector used for EB 800.
Service Manual 3-65

Modules
3.5.3 S0 module
Introduction
This module provides access to ISDN networks and network resources through 2/5 S0
standard digital access channels (4 or 10).
Functions
Each ISDN access provides 2 64 Kbits/s channels, which are used for communication
Depending on whether your carrier has enabled them, some features such as Caller ID,
Caller ID Blocking, Direct dialing to extensions and so on may be provided.
3.5.3.1 HiPath 1120
Interfaces
X1 Connection to the MB through a pin Connector

X2 Port 1 - RJ 45
X3 Port 2 - RJ 45
Figure 3-10 HiPath 1120 S0 module
HiPath 1120 S0 module jumpers
X2 - Port 1 X3 - Port 2
Configuration Jumper Pos. Configuration Jumper Pos.
Extern S0 Trunk X4 = 1-2 Extern S0 Trunk X6 = 1-2
(Point to Point, X5 = 1-2 (Point to Point, X7 = 1-2
Point to Multipoint) Point to Multipoint)
Intern S0-BUS NOT Intern S0-BUS X6 = 2-3
PERMITTED X7 = 2-3
3-66 Service Manual

Modules
3.5.3.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R
X1
Figure 3-11 Module S0 HiPath1150/1190/1190R
The Figure 3-11 features a 5-Port S0, also available as a 2-Port option.
Jumpers
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5
X10 and X11 X50 and X51 X90 and X91 X130 and X131 X170 and X171
Slot 1 and 2 - without RT (resistive termination) (factory default)
Slot 3 and 2 - with RT (resistive termination used when the port is configured as S0-BUS)
Table 3-13 Module S0 HiPath1150/1190/1190Rjumpers
Connector assignments
X1 Connector Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5

X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector
Connection of the MB to
the pin Connector RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45
Table 3-14 S0 module Connectors for HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Service Manual 3-67

Modules
S0 basic access
HiPath 1100 Public network
Cable 4-wire NT
S0
Figure 3-12 S0 Basic access connection
S0 module Connector
1 8 1 = NC
2 = NC
3 = SX +
4 = SR -
5 = SR +
X 6 = SX -
7 = NC
8 = NC
SX = Signal Transmit
SR = Signal Receive
RJ 45
Figure 3-13 S0 Connector signal distribution
Setup and Installation of S0 module Connectors
System Position/slot
HiPath 1120 2
HiPath 1150 3
HiPath 1190/1190R 1 or 11
Table 3-15 Installing an S0 module
3-68 Service Manual

Modules
3.5.4 TME1 module

The TME1 module can be configured to operate with E1 CAS access or S2 access.
I
Warning
! The TME1 module is factory configured to operate as a CAS interface.
In order for the module to work as a S2 interface you must run a reconfiguration pro-
cedure using the S2M Maintenance.
E1 CAS access
The TME1 module with E1 CAS access is a Digital Interface Unit (DIU) used for connecting a
HiPath1150/1190/1190R to a PSTN via an E1 trunk. The E1 trunk can carry 30 digital voice
channels. However, the HiPath 1150 systems use up to 20 channels, while the HiPath 1190
uses up to 30 channels when the TME30 module is allocated to slot 1 and up to 15 channels
when it is allocated to slot 11.
Functions
Increases the systems number of external lines
Provides Caller ID (CLIP) and Direct Dialing to Extensions (DID) to help reduce
call loss rate while simplifying access for the user.
HiPath 1190/1190R: In the event of a problem occurring with the TME1 link with E1
CAS master (see TME1 module display readings (CAS access) on page 3-75) dur-
ing an external call, the system will go into a mute state for approximately 3 seconds
while the system clock is synchronized.
S2 access
It provides connections to the ISDN network via primary access (30 Channels), allowing
services offered by the network to be used.
Functions
It increases the capacity of the systems external up to 20 on the HiPath 1150 and
45 on the HiPath 1190/1190R
The system only operates in Point to Point connections (PP).
The ISDN line may be used for video conferencing (external connection, outside
the exchange)
Service Manual 3-69

Modules
It allows permanent call forwarding to another telephone number (CF), Callback if

currently busy (CCBS), automatic MSN number search (Search MSN), Call
Deflection (CD) and sending ticket information during the last call (AOC-D) at the
end of the call
(AOC-E).
Features such as Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Malicious
Call Identification (MCID), Calling Line Identification Restriction(CLIR), to name
but a few, can be provided if enabled by the local carrier.
HiPath 1190/1190R: In the event of a problem occurring with the TME1 link during
an external call, the S2M master (see Display indications of TME1 module (S2 ac-
cess) on page 3-77) system will go into a mute state for approximately 3 seconds
while the system clock is synchronized.
A TME1 with S2M access operates on TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) non-auto-
matic mode. TEI value must be configured in the S2M Maintenance tool.
Note: In ISDN, some features depend on contracting and the local console.
TME1 interfaces
Figure 3-14 TME1 module
3-70 Service Manual

Modules
S1 Component S2 Component H801 Component

DIP Switch 1 DIP Switch 2 Display
Table 3-16 TME1 module Components
TME1 module Connector assignments
X803 Connector X402 Connector X401 Connector

Serial interface BNC RX Connector BNC TX Connector
Module-PC connection Connections between the Connections between the
module and the alternative module and the alternative
line E1 line E1
Table 3-17 TME1 module Connector assignments
E1 CAS primary access)
HiPath 1100 Public Network
2x coax cable
E1 CAS Modem
Figure 3-15 CAS access connection
Primary Access (S2)
2x coax cable
S2 Modem
Figure 3-16 S2 access connection with 75 ohm impedance
Service Manual 3-71

Modules
Impedance
2x coax cable Cable 4-wire
S2 adapter (Bal- NT1
un)
Figure 3-17 S2 access connection with 120 ohm impedance
Connector for TME1 module configuration

The Connector serves to link a PC or modem to a module using a serial cable (see TME1
Serial Cable on page 3-117). This makes it possible to program the module using the E1 Trunk
Manager tool (for E1 CAS access) or S2M Maintenance tool (S2 access).
9-pin
1 = DCD 6 = DSR
Mini-DIN connector 2 = RX 7 = RTS
3 = TX 8 = CTS
4 = DTR 9 = RI
5 = GND
9 7
6 3
2 1
Figure 3-18 Signal distribution on the TME1 module Connector
Warning
! Do not touch the TME1 modules administrative serial interface Connector (X803)
without first disconnecting all analog extensions and trunk Connectors. Failure to fol-
low this procedure may expose the user to dangerous voltages.
The administrative serial interface Connector (X803) as well as all other Connectors
and interconnect cables should only be serviced by trained technical personnel.
3-72 Service Manual

Modules
DIP Switch positions for the TME1 module
Figure 3-19 DIP Switch for the TME1 module
It is possible to configure the following settings by changing the positions of the Dip switches:
DIP Switch 1 (S1)
Allows you to delete the flash memory, or choose the baud rate.
Switch Procedure Meaning Possible settings

ON - Deletes Flash memory when the PABX is
1 FE Flash memory off turned on
OFF - System will work as usual (default).
Extended Autotest ON - Activates autotest (E1 CAS access)
2 EST
(E1 CAS access) OFF - Skips autotest (default) (E1 CAS access).
2 EST Reserved for future applications (S2M access)
3 BR1 (3) OFF, (4) OFF and (5) OFF: 9600 bps
4 BR2 Baud rate (3) OFF, (4) OFF and (5) ON: 19200 bps
configuration (3) OFF, (4) ON and (5) OFF: 38400 bps
5 BR3 (3) OFF, (4) ON and (5) ON: 57600 bps (default)
6 RES
7 RES For future applications
8 RES
Table 3-18 TME1 module, DIP Switch 1
Service Manual 3-73

Modules
If an error occurs during software installation, clear the Flash memory and reinstall
the software. Follow these instructions:
Turn the PABX off
Set Switch 1 (FE) to ON
Turn the PABX on again
Wait for F and E to show on the display
Turn the PABX off
Set switch 1 (FE) to OFF again
Turn on the PABX
DIP Switch 2 (S2)
It is recommended that you do not change the DIP Switch 2 default setting.
Switch Procedure Default

1 DSP - BIO OFF
2 Reserved OFF
3 Reserved OFF
4 Battery connection OFF
5 MODCK2 ON
6 WDI ON
7 MODCK1 OFF
E1 interface impedance (E1
8 OFF
CAS access)
8 Reserved (S2 access) OFF
Table 3-19 TME1 module, DIP Switch 2
3-74 Service Manual

Modules
Segment Display Readings (H801) (E1 CAS access)
Display Reading Meaning
8 Continuous The module is powered.
] Continuous Starting TME1 module.
Waits 10 seconds for a command from the software (E1

E Continuous Trunk Manager). If it receives no command after the specified
time, the system resumes its usual operation.
8 Continuous Transferring memory contents to DRAM memory.
Continuous Checking and validating contents of Flash memory.
P Continuous TME1 module is active but CAS link is out of service.
A Continuous TME1 module is active with CAS link.
I Continuous
Unpacking E1 Trunk Manager.
3 Continuous
7 Continuous Writing software to Flash memory.
F Continuous Checking transferred data.
o Continuous E1 and CAS links are down. The reason is unknown.
3 Cycle - Live Clearing Flash memory.
f e Alternating Flash memory cleared.
h Continuous
No software in Flash memory. Waiting for tool to download
software
A. Continuous
The local interface is taking the clock as reference from this
link.
Table 3-20 TME1 module display readings (CAS access)
Service Manual 3-75

Modules
7-segment display readings (H801) (S2 access)
0 Continuous Wait connection with S2M Maintenance tool.
1 Continuous Starting TME1 module.
E Continuous
Waits 10 seconds for a command from the software (S2M
Maintenance).
8 Continuous Transferring memory contents to DRAM memory.
Continuous Checking and validating contents of Flash memory.
Continuous with
A segment g
blinking
TME1 module active with both links established.
2 or 3 Continuous Loading software from Flash.
7 Continuous Writing software to Flash memory.
F Continuous Checking transferred data.
3 Cycle - Live Clearing Flash memory.
f e Alternating Flash memory cleared.
h Continuous
No software in Flash memory. Waiting for Tool to download
software
8. Continuous Power up reset.
Continuous Clearing Flash memory.
Continuous DIU-S2M starting.
DIU-S2M operating normally. If it stops blinking, indicates

blinking
that the module is no longer working.
. blinking TME1 is synchronizing clock via external network.
3-76 Service Manual

Modules
Continuous Network link operational.
Continuous Link with mainboard operational.
Table 3-21 Display indications of TME1 module (S2 access)
3.5.5 UP0/E module and CTR UP0/E module
Introduction
With these modules you can connect UP0/E telephones (optiPoint 500) to a HiPath 1150/1190
via 8, 4 or 2 UP0/E interfaces, and to a HiPath 1120 system via 4 or 2 UP0/E interfaces (see
System expansion limitations on page 2-30).
CTR-U module installation is required.P0/E no in MB module (see Installing a CTR-

UP0/E module on page 4-158 )
3.5.5.1 UP0/E module
HiPath 1120
Interfaces
Figure 3-20 UP0/E module HiPath 1120
Service Manual 3-77

Modules
UP0/E module Connector assignments
X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 X4
port port
Flat Cable for MB Additional flat cable for MB a1 - port 1 a3 - port 3
b1 - port 1 b3 - port 3
a2 - port 2 a4 - port 4
Table 3-22 UP0/E module Connectors HiPath 1120
Note: UP0/E modules for the HiPath 1120 may have 4 or 2 ports.
HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
Figure 3-21 UP0/E module HiPath1150/1190/1190R
3-78 Service Manual

Modules
UP0/E module Connector assignments
X1 Connector X2 X3
port port
backplane a1 - port 1 a5 - port 5
Table 3-23 UP0/E module Connector assignments HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Note: UP0/E modules for HiPath 1150/1190/8 may have 8, 4 or 2 ports.
3.5.5.2 CTR-UP0/E module
IHiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
Figure 3-22 CTR-UP0/E module HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
Service Manual 3-79

Modules
3.6 Optional modules (MO)
3.6.1 LAN interface modules
Introduction
These provide a LAN Ethernet interface via their RJ45 Connectors that allow direct PC
connections to HiPath 1100 within the network and if you have an ADSL modem available, they
can share ADSL access, dispensing with the need for an external ADSL modem or HUB.
The HiPath 1100 can interact via the LAN network with the applications used in your
administration, such as: HiPath 1100 Manager, SNMP services, Interaction Center Smart,
Raters, etc.
The modules have been developed for use on the HiPath 1100 based on ADSL (Asymmetric
Digital Subscriber Line) technology. It is therefore possible to receive high-speed data and voice
(up to 8 Mbit/s) through a single pair on a standard telephone line (POTS).
HiPath 1100 Service Center

Service PC with
HiPath 1100 Manager
PSTN
PSTN In-
terface
(
Modem analog or
digital network)
LIM
LAN
of the cli-
ent
Products and applications, such asHiPath
1100 Manager , SNMP, etc.
Figure 3-23 Functions via LAN network.
3-80 Service Manual

Modules
Do not connect the V.24 interface to the PABX when using a network interface
cable. All data is delivered through the network.
ADSL modem access must be enabled by a carrier for one of the PABX lines.
An Internet provider is also required.
Remember to configure the ADSL connection in the CommServer.
All the PCs must have a network card installed and be in the same network as
the LAN interface module.
3.6.1.1 ADSL module

This is a previous version used initially on HiPath 1100 V6.0 equipped with ADSL modem
functions and LAN interface on the same board.
The parameters required for this to work correctly must be set using the administration software
HiPath 1100 Manager on page 7-336.
Functions
ASDL modem with Full ADSL (8 Mbps downstream and 1 Mbps upstream - ITU G.922,1)
and ADSL G2.Lite (1.5 Mbps downstream and 512 kbps upstream - ITU G2.922,2, ANSI
T1.413-1998 Standard) capability.
4 10/100 Base-T standard HUB ports with four ports for building a small LAN.
Module with built-in microfilter to separate voice and data signals.
Service Manual 3-81

Modules
HiPath 1120
Interfaces
Figure 3-24 ADSL module HiPath 1120
ADSL module Connector assignments
Contact X1 X2 J3 J5 J6 J7
1 Connection Incoming RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
2 to the MB is external line Connector Connector Connector Connector
through a with ADSL HUB HUB HUB HUB
3 pin External
Connector analog line
4
output
Table 3-24 HiPath 1120 ADSL module Connectors
Note: Connect X2 Connector slots 3 and 4 to a HiPath 1120 external analog line input using
the cable included with the module.
3-82 Service Manual

Modules
HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
Figure 3-25 ADSL module HiPath1150/1190/1190R
ADSL module Connector assignments
Contact X2 J3 J5 J6 J7
Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector
1 Incoming RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
2 external line Connector Connector Connector Connector
with ADSL HUB HUB HUB HUB
3 External
4 analog line
output
Table 3-25 HiPath1150/1190/1190R ADSL module Connectors
Note: Connect X2 Connector slots 3 and 4 to a HiPath1150/1190/1190R external analog line

input using the cable included with the module.
Service Manual 3-83

Modules
3.6.1.2 SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC and ADSLIM modules

In this version we have the set comprising a LIM module (LAN Interface Module) and the ADSL
modem (Baby Board ADSL) which can be optionally mounted on the board.
HiPath 1120 : SLIMC module (LAN) and SADSLIM module (LAN + ADSL modem)
HiPath1150/1190/1190R : LIMC module (LAN) and ADSLIM module (LAN + ADSL
modem)
Notes:
These modules already have the CommServer application installed and do not need to be
connected directly to a PC to administer the PABX, only to the LAN.
To set the required parameters of the modules, use the Configuring the SpeedStream
4100 modem on page 7-354 and the administration tool Siemens Admin Console on
page 7-352.
The ADSL modem used is the Siemens SpeedStream 4100. You can consult the
configuration instructions in the manual which you will find in the Setup and
Installation CD.
HiPath 1120
Interfaces
SLIMC and SADSLIM module:
Figure 3-26 SLIMC and SDASLIM module HiPath 1120
3-84 Service Manual

Modules
Note: Connect X11 Connector slots 3 and 4 to a HiPath 1120 external analog line input using
the cable included with the module.
Connector assignments of SLIMC and SADSLIM module
Contact X2 X3 X4 X5 X11 X17

1 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Incoming Connection
2 Connector Connector Connector Connector external line to the MB is
HUB HUB HUB HUB with ADSL through a
3 External pin
analog line Connector
4
output
X6 X7 X14
Connector Connector Connector
Connection Baby Board ADSL
s of the ADSL power line
Baby Board supply
ADSL
Ethernet
Interface
Table 3-26 Connectors of the SLIMC and SDASLIM module HiPath 1120
Service Manual 3-85

Modules
HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
LIMC and ADSLIM module:
Figure 3-27 LIMC and ADSLIM module HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Connector assignments of the LIMC and ADSLIM module
Contact X2 Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X5 Connector X11 Connector

1 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Incoming
2 Connector Connector Connector Connector external line
HUB HUB HUB HUB with ADSL
3 External analog
4 line output
X6 Connector X7 Connector X14

Connector
Baby Board Baby Board ADSL
ADSL Ethernet ADSL power line
Interface supply
Table 3-27 Connectors of the LIMC and ADSLIM module HiPath1150/1190/1190R
3-86 Service Manual

Modules
Note: Connect X11 Connector slots 3 and 4 to a HiPath1150/1190/1190R external analog line
input using the cable included with the module.
3.6.1.3 Baby Board ADSL
Introduction
Provides ADSL services through the SpeedStream 4100 modem to the SADSLIM and ADSLIM
modules.
If you do not have the Baby Board ADSL, you will not be able to access ADSL, only
the LAN network.
HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
X7
X6
X14
Figure 3-28 Baby Board ADSL HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
Service Manual 3-87

Modules
Baby Board ADSL Connector assignments

Baby Board ADSL Baby Board ADSL ADSL line
Ethernet Interface power supply
Table 3-28 Baby Board ADSL Connectors HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
3.6.2 EVM module
Introduction
This module allows you to use Voice Mail services with the HiPath 1100 family of switches.
Functions
24 standard mailboxes, four of which can be used as forwarding mailboxes (for auto-
answering, greeting with transfer options, day/night service, speed dial)
Mailboxes may be automatically associated
User-configurable mailboxes
Message/music playback before answering
Up to two different greetings
Manual or day/night service greeting selection
Context-sensitive Users Guide
Messages inform users of current menu options.
Two actions allow for call transfer and auto-answering (2 ports)
Capability for up to 120 minutes of voice recording
Maximum voice message recording time for each mailbox is 5 minutes, configurable from
1 to 5 minutes. The default setting is 2 minutes
Date and time display for each message
Fax calls transfer (auto-detect) to a pre-configured fax destination
Memory overload alert when it exceeds 80%
3-88 Service Manual

Modules
HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R
Interfaces
Figure 3-29 HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R EVM module
Connector assignments
X1 Connector
Connects to MB through a pin Connector
Table 3-29 EVM HiPath 1120/1150/1190/1190R module Connector
Service Manual 3-89

Modules
3.6.3 CD 16 module
Introduction
This is an expansion module to provide support for over 16 CD interfaces on the HiPath
1190/1190R and for connecting more than 16 KS type system telephones.
The CD 16 module has a dedicated slot for burning CDs.
When a UP0/E module is connected to the HiPath 1190/1190R, the CD 16 mod-
7 ule is disabled.
CD 16 Interfaces
Figure 3-30 CD 16 module
Note: CD interfaces on a CD 16 module are installed subsequently to CD interfaces on the MB

module.
3-90 Service Manual

Modules
CD 16 module Connector assignments
Contact X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X5 Connector

1 Connection to C - port 1 C - port 5 C - port 9 C - port 13
2 MB through D - port 1 D - port 5 D - port 9 D - port 13
backplane
3 Connector C - port 2 C - port 6 C - port 10 C - port 14
4 D - port 2 D - port 6 D - port 10 D - port 14
5 C - port 3 C - port 7 C - port 11 C - port 15
7 C - port 4 C - port 8 C - port 12 C - port 16
Table 3-30 CD 16 module Connector assignments
3.6.4 Music module
Introduction
Allows music input for external calls on hold.
Note: The Music module is only for the HiPath 1120.
Functions
Links a recorded message or an external music source (MOH) to a UCD group when all
group extensions are busy.
It also features a relay and a sensor for supporting additional devices such as entrance
telephones, door openers, alarms, etc.
You can insert music for external calls placed on hold (MOH) using an internal or external
music source.
Service Manual 3-91

Modules
3.6.4.1 HiPath 1120
Interfaces
Figure 3-31 Music module
Music module Connector assignments
X1 X1 Connector X12 Connector X2 Connector

Contact RCA
1 and 2 Sensor external music input (MOH) Connection to the MB is
3 and 4 Relay --- through a pin Connector
Table 3-31 Music module Connector assignments
The activation logic based on the initial position of the sensor contacts and its result-
ing actions are programmable.
If a sensor is programmed, the relay can be activated through that sensor. It can be
activated either manually or automatically after a specified time. When the relay is
activated, the contacts close. When it is deactivated, the contacts open.
3-92 Service Manual

Modules
Electrical Requirements for Sensors and Relays
Sensor
Maximum loop resistance 100
Relay
Maximum switching current (AC) 1.25 A
Maximum switching current (DC) 2A
Maximum switching voltage (AC) 30 VRMS
Maximum switching voltage (DC) 24 V
Maximum power factor 0.95
Table 3-32 Electrical requirements for sensors and relays
3.6.4.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R
For HiPath1150/1190/1190R the external audio source (music, for example) is directly
connected to the MB in position X8 (see Figure 3-3 for HiPath1150 and Figure 3.4 for
HiPath1190/1190R) or in an analog extension port.
Connection Values for an external music source*
Internal Resistance 2.4k

Maximum input
-10 dBm
voltage
*** This port supports commercial CD players, receivers, MD, etc. (See Figure 4-45, Protection and grounding connection
diagram, on page 4-184).
3.7 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
Introduction
The power supply unit (PSU) provides the required voltages for the correct operation of the
entire system.
The power sources of the HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems can have connections available to
a row of batteries, which guarantee constant power supply should there be an outage in the AC
line.
Service Manual 3-93

Modules
Functions
Ring tone generator
DC power source for circuits
AC input voltage converter/filter
3.7.1 HiPath 1120
Description
Two versions of power supply units are available for the HiPath 1120:
BRA and IM: supply voltage: 110 - 127 Vac - 50/60 Hz or 220 Vac - 50/60 Hz
RSA: supply voltage: 220 Vac - 50/60 Hz
ARG: supply voltage: 220 Vac - 50/60 Hz
SPA: supply voltage: 220 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
PSU interface
1 ......................... 10
Figure 3-32 System PSU interface HiPath 1120
3-94 Service Manual

Modules
PSU Connector assignments (HiPath 1120)
Function
Contacts
RSA SPA IM
1 Free Free Free
2-3 8 Vrms 8 Vrms 8 Vrms
8-9 Free Free Free
10 Free Free Free
Table 3-33 PSU Connector assignments HiPath 1120
Warning
! Turn the system power ON or OFF using the power supply cable or the input circuit
breaker.
3.7.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Supply voltage: 110 - 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz, full range
The power supplys 5 x 20mm input (VAC) features two FAST fuses (250V - 4A)
NB
! For the HiPath1150/1190/1190R with battery connection input (BBU), you need to
install the ferrite (C39022-Z7000-C7) in the AC power cable, which must be no fur-
ther than 20 mm from the female connector (see Chapter 3.12.7, Power supply ca-
ble of the PSU - HiPath1150/1190/1190R on page 3-123 ).
There are 2 types of power supply:

With battery connection socket
Without battery connection socket
Service Manual 3-95

Modules
PSU Interfaces HiPath 1150
PSU without battery input
AC input
Indication of the connection slot

on the backplane
PSU with battery input
Interconnect cable
PSU-Batteries
AC input
Indication of the connection slot

on the backplane
Figure 3-33 System PSU interface HiPath 1150
3-96 Service Manual

Modules
PSU HiPath 1190/1190R Interfaces
PSU without battery input
Indication of slot
slot position on the
backplane
AC input
PSU with battery input
Indication of slot
slot position on the
backplane
Warning!
Cable polarity indication is printed on the - +
case over the Connectors.
1 - Connector used to link the PSUs via the 1

Interconnect cable between the PSUs and 2
also used to connect the batteries via the PSU -
battery interconnect cables in the 1st PSU
located in the base of the system (see Battery
interconnect cables (BBU) on page 3-122)
2 - Connector for connecting the Vshare cable to
the PSUs 3 2 1
Figure 3-34 PSU systems interfaceHiPath 1190/1190R
Service Manual 3-97

Modules
Batteries
Warning
! If the power supply is not supplying the output voltages shown in Table 3-34, open
it and check the condition of the fuses.
PSU Connector assignments
Contact Function Contact Function

1 +5.1 VDC 2 +5.1 VDC
3 +5.1 VDC 4 +5.1 VDC
5 +5.1 VDC 6 +5.1 VDC
7 GND 8 GND
9 GND 10 GND
11 GND 12 GND
13 26.4 VDC 14 26.4 VDC
15 26.4 VDC 16 26.4 VDC
17 26.4 VDC 18 26.4 VDC
19 GND 20 GND
21 GND 22 GND
23 GND 24 GND
25 50 VAC + 97 VDC 26 50 VAC + 97 VDC
42 VAC + 85.8 VDC (RSA) 42 VAC + 85.8 VDC (RSA)
Table 3-34 PSU Connector assignments for HiPath1150/1190/1190R
3.8 Batteries
The HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems can be powered with batteries if the AC line is down,
thus guaranteeing a continuous electrical supply to telephony services. Battery duty cycle
varies according to the capacity of the battery installed
Systems and battery set (2x12v) are joined by a connection cable (see Battery interconnect
cables (BBU) on page 3-122)
Note: The power supply used in the systems must have a battery connection socket (BBU) (see
Power Supply Unit (PSU) on page 3-93).
3-98 Service Manual

Modules
Batteries
Batteries
Figure 3-35 Batteries
Caution
Technical Data
Battery Type Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)

Voltage 27.2V
Supply voltage 24V (2X12V)
Capacity 9Ah to 12Ah at 20h discharge
Table 3-35 Batteries - technical information
Service Manual 3-99

Modules
Main Distribution Frame
3.8.1 Examples of Configurations X Capacities x Times

As an example, a simulation was carried out in some of the settings of the HiPath 1150/1190
systems for the working period of the system when there is in an outage in the AC network
under normal call traffic conditions.
HiPath 1150
Settings Battery capacity Working period

01 MB 7Ah 14 hours
01 MB + 01TME1 7Ah 10 hours
01 MB + 01 EB 210 7Ah 11 hours
Table 3-36 Examples of the working period of the batteries in the HiPath 1150
Increasing by one EB 210 module reduces the total time by 15 minutes.
HiPath 1190
Settings Battery capacity Working period

01 CPU + 01 EB 210 7Ah 11 hours
01 CPU + 01 EB 210 + 01TME1 7Ah 9 hours
01 CPU + 02 EB 210 + 02TME1 7Ah 4 hours
Table 3-37 Examples of the working period of the batteries in the HiPath 1190
Increasing by one EB 210 module reduces the total time by 15 minutes. If the working period
is less than 1.5 hours, this falls by 5 minutes.
3.9 Main Distribution Frame
Introduction
The Main Distribution Frame (MDF) connects cabling to a public exchange and extensions
using Connectors.
Follow the procedures described in Chapter 4.9, Connections to the systems MDF on page
4-170 to attach the cables to the MDF Connectors.
All Connectors required for attaching the cables are provided with the modules and systems.
3-100 Service Manual

Modules
Backplane
MDF Interfaces
Cables are attached using

pressure
(Dinkle Connector)
Cables are attached 4-way 8-way

with
screws
Cables are attached using 2-way

Connectors
(for example, RJ 45)
Figure 3-36 MDF - Connectors
3.10 Backplane
Introduction
In the HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems, a set of Connectors mounted on a printed circuit
board known as the backplane connects the modules to the motherboard.
3.10.1 HiPath 1150
Interfaces
Figure 3-37 Backplane HiPath 1150
Service Manual 3-101

Modules
Backplane
Two identical backplanes are provided with the systems as shown in Figure A. In some cases
you may need to insert a ferrite bead into the backplane. If the module came with a ferrite bead,
install it as shown in Figures B and C.
3.10.2 HiPath 1190/1190R
Interfaces
Figure 3-38 HiPath 1190 backplanes
HiPath 1190/1190R backplane Connector assignments
Connectors 1, 2 and 3 Slots

DC input (PSU) see Table 4-3
Table 3-38 HiPath 1190/1190R backplane Connectors

Modules
Entrance telephone
3.11 Entrance telephone

The HiPath 1100 can be connected to 2 different types of entrance telephone:
The internal entrance telephone, which uses a connection interface between the door
device and the PABX (for example, TFE)
The external entrance telephone, connected directly to the A/B or S0 slot
For further information on installation, settings and requirements, consult the

Entrance Telephone installation manual.
3.11.1 Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface
Introduction
With the HiPath 1100 you can connect up to twenty entrance telephones in extension slots. The
connection is made using an interface between the entrance telephone and the PABXs.
HiPath 1100 - a/b Entrance telephone amplifier

a1 b1
a
a2
Entrance telephone
b2
b 2, 3 or 4 wire connec-
tion, depending on
TS1
the manufacturer
TS2
KL1
Bell
KL2
TO1 Electric latch
TO2
Power supply
12-16 V
UB1
UB2
TFE interface
Figure 3-39 Connections to the TFE interface

a1/b1 Connection to the system
a2/b2 Connection of the amplifier of the entrance telephone

Modules
Entrance telephone
KL1/KL2Connection of the bell (NB, do not use power supplies from other manufacturers)
TO1/TO2Connection of the relay to the electric latch
UB1/UB2Power supply for TFE (12-16 V)
TS1/TS2Contact for activating the amplifier of the entrance telephone (if required*)
*newer amplifiers have a programmable automatic disconnection system. In this case, this
connection will not be required.
3.11.1.1 Examples of connection
No amplifier
Model: S30817-K930-A300 - TFE
EGUCOM (Ackermann, Emmerich)
HiPath 1100
a b
Electric latch
a1 b1 TS1 TS2 UB1 UB2 TO1 TO2 KL1 KL2 a2 b2 TFE interface
EGUCOM TSS module

a b TS TS 12V~ 12V~ KL KL kl kl A B
La Lb Z1 Z2 EGUCOM entrance telephone
Figure 3-40 EGUCOM entrance telephone by Ackermann (Emmerich)

Modules
Entrance telephone
Grothe,Telegrtner
HiPath 1100
a b
Electric latch
Grothe transformer
12V~ TR 1973 K
TR
TS1 TS2 12 V~ 12 V~ a b
Grothe TFE
6205
TR
KT
Figure 3-41Grothe entrance telephone

HDL - Brazil (models: F3A, F4A, F5A)
Figure 3-42 HDL entrance telephone - Brazil
Additional components include: R1 (1,2 k / 0,25W / 5%) and R2 (33 / 0,25W / 5%) resistors,
and C1 capacitor (1,0 F / 250 Vac / Non-polarized). The connection to the PABX is made with
two wires (a1 / b1) while the connection to the entrance telephone interface is made with four
wires (a2 / b2, KL1, KL2).

Modules
Entrance telephone
With amplifier
Model: S30122-k7696-F313 - TFE
Ritto
HiPath 1100
a b Electric latch
Power supply
+ 2 12 6~ 7~
universal 6573.02
Entrance telephone
6 12 TS TS A B
amplifier 5680.00
Entrance tele-
+ 6 2 + ~ ~ phone 5760 ...
Button
~ ~ K1 K
TM 5761..
Figure 3-43Ritto entrance telephone
For further information, see the TFE Adapter Installation Manual A31003-E8000-
X167-*-19 included with the TFE interface.

Modules
Entrance telephone
Version for Brazil

Model S30817-Q936-C282 - Brazil
For installation in models: F5AZL, F8AZ, F9AZ
Figure 3-44 Overview entrance telephone interface - S30817-Q936-C282
Only one entrance telephone may be connected to each module of the TFE inter-
face.
Each TFE module works as an entrance telephone OR pager interface. To use
both functions, two modules are required.

Modules
Entrance telephone
3.11.1.2 TFE-S interface

This links an interface of system analog connections with an entrance telephone and a bell
button. This is controlled using a system that allows the connection of commercial-type passive
button pads. Each TFE-S interface requires its own power supply.
a/b
TUE Latch
X4
electric
X3
TUE
VCC AC
DC
bell X3 AC
AC
6 - 12V
Low-voltage detector
VCC Transformer
(high impedance)
VCC VCC
MIC power supply
Call detector
(high impedance)

1 ca. 44s44
VCC
Button pad
5 mA Mute MIC+
Voice circuit X5 MIC-
LS1
amplifier X5 LS2
KLI
X4 KLI
Bell button
Figure 3-45 Connections of the TFE-S interface
Warning
7 In the analog interface, the a wire must be connected to the negative and the b wire
to the positive.

Modules
Entrance telephone
Table 3-39 Attribution of TFE-S contacts
Pin X3 terminal X4 terminal X5 terminal X1 jumper X2 jumper

No.
1 AC (a wire) - Speaker (LS1) 2 and 3 = Zn Ritto
2 and 3
2 AC (b wire) + Speaker (LS2)
1 and 2 = 600
3 Contact of the Contact of the Microphone ohm Siedle
electic bell (KLI) (MIC+) 1 and 2
latch(TUE)
4 Contact of the Contact of the Microphone
electric bell (KLI) (MIC-)
latch (TUE)

Modules
Entrance telephone
X1
Connection in:
Button pad
Ritto 5760
Potentiometer
- +
X5 X4 X3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X2
X1 Connection in:
Button pad
Siedle TLM 511-01
Potentiometer
- + (Siedle TLM 511-02 -
not possible!)
X5 X4 X3
1 2 3 4 X2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Figure 3-46 Assigning button pad contacts
Examples of connection
Depending on the functions desired, the connection should be made with an electric entrance
telephone (TFE-S) with amplifier.
In the analog interface, the a wire should be connected to the negative and the b wire to
the positive.

Modules
Entrance telephone
Ritto Siedle TFE-S

5760 LM 511-01
2 12 LS1
+ 13 LS2 X1 bridge
+ 14 MIC+
6 11 MIC-
X5 terminal - +
Potentiometer
X2 bridge
Bell button
A
B X4 terminal
KLI
KLI
AC
Electric latch AC X3 terminal
relay TOEI
TOEI
LS1/LS2 = Speaker
a
MIC +/MIC- = Microphone Net-
a/b = System extension b
KLI/KLI = bell contact HiPath 1100 Transformer
AC/AC = Bell transformer of the bell
TOE/TOE = Electric latch relay 6 - 12 V
The potentiometer must be adjusted according to the instructions of the models con-
nected to it.
Do not change the X1 bridge (Germany)
Contact charge of the electric latch, maximum 24V, 2A
Figure 3-47 Connection with Siedle TLM 511-01 and Ritto 5760 button pad

Modules
Entrance telephone
Specific notes
Siedle: the following changes should be made to the Siedle TLM 511-01 button
pad:
1.Open the Siedle button pad
2.Open bridges 1, 3 and 4
3.Change the wire of the Speaker of the bl pin for the 12 pin
4.Close the Siedle button pad
X2 bridge
Ritto: In the Ritto 5760 button pad, the potentiometer should be

adjusted to 3/4 of the maximum volume.
X2 bridge
Note:
If there is a bridge between + and + (in the button pad), it should be re-
moved, otherwise the adapter TFE-S could be damaged.
The X1 bridge remains in the factory position.
3.11.2 External entrance telephone
Introduction
The use of an external entrance telephone is defined during the programming phase of the
Type of equipment connected to the extension, code 003. This option supports up to 4 devices
connected directly to analog ports A/B or in the bar of the S0 module.
Please consult installation and configuration requirements for the entrance

telephones in their documentation.
3.11.2.1 Analog external entrance telephone

The external analog entrance telephone device must behave like an analog telephone (dialing,
detection and DTMF control)

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.11.2.2 ISDN external entrance telephone

The ISDN external entrance telephone device must behave like an ISDN telephone. It must
also be controlled by DTMF signals.
Consult the ISDN external entrance telephone manual to check available settings
and installation instructions.
Go to the HiPath 1100 Manager folder - Advanced/System Settings/General -
"External entrance telephone" and insert the information on the entrance telephone
device for correct working.
3.12 Interconnect cables
3.12.1 V.24 Adapter Cable
The V.24 serial interface module cannot be used if the system has an ADSL Module
installed.
A V.24 adapter cable (S30122-x5468-x5-*) is used for connecting HiPath 1100 to a PC, a
modem (for programming the system using the HiPath 1100 Manager software, and for
enabling CTI features) or a printer (for printing call or configuration data).
.
Additional electronics built into the cables provide level adaptation. V.24 operation
requires level adaptation.
If it is necessary to use another serial cable as an extension to connect the comput-
er/printer/modem to the HiPath 1100, the maximum total length should not exceed
15 metres.

Modules
Interconnect cables
Length approx 6"

Length 102 "
MB
6-pin SIC mini-DIN

connector
9-pin female
SubD connector
VCC 6 5 RTS
Level adaptation on Adapter
5 GND
RxD 4 3 CTS the cable and Free 9
4 Free PC
2 1 Galvanic Insulation CTS 8
TxD GND 3 TxD Printer
RTS 7
2 RxD Modem
Free 6
1 Free
Figure 3-48 V.24 adapter cable connection system
V.24 adapter cable signals
Pin Signal
CTS Clear To Send
GND Ground
RTS Request to send
RxD Receive Data
TxD Transmit Data
Table 3-40 V.24 adapter cable signals

Modules
Interconnect cables
9-pin SubD 25-pin SubD

Connector Connector
TxD2 TxD2
RxD3 RxD3
RTS7 CTS5
CTS8 RTS4
GND5 GND7
DSR6
DTR20
9-pin SubD 25-pin SubD

Connector Connector
TxD2 RxD3
DSR6
RTS7 DCD8
DTR20
GND5 GND7
Figure 3-49 Modem and adapter connection system to

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.12.2 USB adapter cable

A USB adapter cable is used for connecting to a PC or a modem (for programming the system
using the HiPath 1100 Manager software, and for enabling CTI features).
Additional electronics in the cable (EN 60950-1) provide galvanic insulation between
the HiPath and the PC. This product draws power from both the HiPath and a PC,
and may therefore only be used on HiPath 1100 switches. A USB connection in other
types of equipment will not work with this cable. Siemens does not recommend any
other means of connecting the HiPath 1100 to the PC.
Length. 6"
USB Cable
2.0/1.x A to B standard
HiPath 1100 PC
(MB) Modem
4-pin
Mini-DIN connector
VCC GND
Galvanic
2 4
Insulation
D- 1 3 D+
Figure 3-50 USB adapter cable connection system
USB adapter cable signals
Pin Signal
D+ and D- Data, specifies communication
speed
GND Ground
Table 3-41 USB adapter cable signals

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.12.3 TME1 Serial Cable

The TME1 serial cable (C39195-A9700-B532-*) is used for connecting to a PC or modem in
order to program the system using the E1 Trunk Manager tool.
Length: 9.8 feet
MB
PC
Modem
9-pin male Mini-DIN
connector 9-pin female
2 = RX 1 = DCD 2 = RX 1 = DCD
3 = TX 3 = TX SubD Connector
4 = DTR 4 = DTR
5 = GND 5 = GND 5 GND
9 7 RI 9
6 = DSR 6 = DSR 4 DSR
6 3 7 = RTS 7 = RTS RTS 8
8 = CTS 8 = CTS 3 RX
2 1 CTS 7
9 = RI 9 = RI 2 TX
1 = DCD 6 = DSR DTR 6
1 DCD
2 = RX 7 = RTS
3 = TX 8 = CTS
4 = DTR 9 = RI
5 = GND
Figure 3-51 Serial cable connection to TME1
TME1 serial cable signals
Pin Signal
DCD Date Carrier Detect
CTS Clear To Send
DSR Data Send Ready
DTR Data Station Ready
GND Ground
RTS Request to send
RX Receive Data
TX Transmit Data
RI Ring indicator
Table 3-42 TME1 serial cable signals

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.12.4 Adapter cable for analog modem

This is a serial cable for connecting the Trendnet V.92 56K - TFM-560X or D-Link V.90 56K -
DFM - 560EL modem on the HiPath 1100 using the V.24 cable.
.
The maximum total length of the cable and of the interface V.24 should not exceed
15 metros
You must configure/check the starting position of the modem connected to the
switch via HiPath 1100 Manager.
If the modem is connected to the PC (remote modem), the modem cable should be
used and the initialization code set using CommServer.
This information can be obtained from the modems instruction manual.
In the Reset field the default setting for these modems is as follows:
US-ROBOTICS: ATZH0
TrendNet: ATZH0
D-LINK: +++,,,ATHATZH0
In the Initialization field, the default setting for these modems is as follows:
US-ROBOTICS: AT&F0&B1F1S0=0
TrendNet: AT&F0&B1F1&D0S0=0.
D-LINK: AT&F0&D0S0=0

Modules
Interconnect cables
Interface
V.24 Modem
9-pin male SubD 2 = RX 2 = RX 9-pin female

Connector 3 = TX 3 = TX SubD Connector
5 = GND 5 = GND
5 GND 7 = RTS 7 = RTS 5 GND
Free 9 Free 9
4 Free 8 = CTS 8 = CTS 4 Free
CTS 8 CTS 8
3 TX 3 TX
RTS 7 RTS 7
2 RX 2 RX
Free 6 Free 6
1 Free 1 Free
Figure 3-52 Connection system of the serial cable to the analog modem.

Modules
Interconnect cables
Serial cable to modem signals
Pin Signal
CTS Clear To Send
GND Ground
RTS Request to send
RX Receive Data
TX Transmit Data
Table 3-43 Serial cable to modem signals
3.12.5 TME1 Coax Cable
3.12.5.1 CAS Access

The TME1 coax cable (C39195-A9700-B531-*) is used for connecting to the E1 interface with
a modem.
TME1 coax cable signals
Pin Signal
RX Receive Data
TX Transmit Data
Table 3-44 TME1 coax cable signals

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.12.5.2 S2 access
The TME1 coax cable is used for connecting to the S2 interface with an NT modem. If there is
a different impedance between the module and the modem, you must use the Balun.
Balun
TME1 coax cable signals
Pin Connector Signal

RX J1 Receive Data
TX J2 Transmit Data
Table 3-45 TME1 coax cable signals
Balun
You must use the balun on the TME1 coax cable if there is any impedance differential between
the TME1 and the NT1 modules.
Technical Data
Speed up to 2,048 Mbps

Insulation 100V
Connectors Coaxial (Interface A): Dual BNC F(RG 59)
Twister - pair (Interface B): 8 - pin shielded RJ 45

Modules
Interconnect cables
Speed up to 2,048 Mbps

Tolerance temperature 32 to 122F
Transmission line ITU CTR -12 G.703
Tolerance humidity 5 to 95%
Table 3-46 Technical data of the balun.
3.12.6 Battery interconnect cables (BBU)
Battery to PSU interconnect cables

These cables are used to link the batteries to the power supply of the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
(see Chapter 4.8, Installing the power supply on page 4-163).
Vshare cable
HiPath 1190
Interconnect cable between

the PSUs in the HiPath 1190
Interconnect cable
PSU - Interconnect cable
with batteries
Battery connection kit Interconnect cable with Serial interconnect cable

L30251-U600-A617 the batteries
+
between batteries
Figure 3-53 Battery interconnect cables (BBU)
Technical data on interconnect cable with the batteries

This protects against power surges.
Fuse of the interconnect cable 7.5A (uniVAL - manufactured by MTA)

Length of the interconnect cable 16.4 feet
Table 3-47 Technical data of the battery interconnect cable

Modules
Interconnect cables
3.12.7 Power supply cable of the PSU - HiPath1150/1190/1190R

The ferrite that comes with the cable must also be installed (see Chapter 4.8, Installing the
power supply on page 4-163).
HiPath 1190/1190R HiPath 1150
Ferrite (C39022-Z7000-C7)
installed at most
20 mm from the female connector
Figure 3-54 Power supply cable of the PSU - HiPath 1150

Modules
Interconnect cables

Installation
HiPath 1100 Installation
4 Installation
4.1 HiPath 1100 Installation
About this Chapter

This chapter contains information on:
Installing the interface HiPath 1100. More information on additional equipment and
expansions can be found in the List of modules on page 3-44
Configuration (installation of modules).
Danger
! Only authorized technical personnel should install this system.
Tools and equipment required

The following tools are required for installing a HiPath 1100 system:
Cutters and flat nose pliers
Standard screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
Tool for attaching wires to the Main Distribution Frame
Drill
Hammer
Level
Tape measure
Digital multimeter for checking power and ground connections.

Installation
Installation Procedures
4.2 Installation Procedures
Warning
! Before installing the equipment, please read carefully all information and
recommendations provided in Chapter 1, Important Information
When connecting to live terminal equipment lines powered by an external AC
power source, the maximum number of terminal equipment allowed is 14 per
system. Exceeding this limit may damage the equipment and put user safety at
risk.
Check whether all AC and DC connections of the cables, modules and chassis
of the HiPath 1100 are correctly and properly connected before connecting the
client interface.
Step Installation procedures (Information)

1. Select the location for installing the equipment 4-127
(Usually already defined)
2. Unpacking system components 4-128
3. Getting to know your systems 4-128
4. HiPath1120/1150 wall mounting instructions 4-137
5. Installing modules 4-138
6. Installing the power supply 4-163
7. Connections to the systems MDF 4-170
8. Installing a V.24 Interface 4-177
9. Installing a USB Interface 4-178
10. Installing an external Audio Source 4-180
11. Installing a TFE - entrance telephone interface 4-180
12. Recommendations concerning the Power Supply and Protection of the 4-182
System
13. Protective power outage relays 4-185
14. System cabling 4-186
15. Installing telephone terminals 4-186
16. Performing a visual inspection 4-189
Table 4-1 HiPath 1100 - Equipment installation procedures

Installation
Select the location for installing the equipment
Caution
! Always use an anti-static wrist band when working with the HiPath 1100 systems
(particularly when handling the modules). Make sure the wrist band is grounded.
4.3 Select the location for installing the equipment
Installation Location
The systems installation site has been previously selected and agreed to by the client.
The following precautions must be taken:
Do not expose the equipment to any external heat source (e.g., sunlight, heaters, etc.)
Do not expose the equipment to excess dust
Do not install the equipment in areas where there is a risk of condensation when the
equipment is in use. If condensation occurs, dry the equipment before starting operation.
Do not install inside closets.
The power outlet for connecting the systems power supply must be located close to the
equipment and must be easily accessible.
Follow all environmental guidelines described in the chapter System Data (see
Environmental conditions on page 2-40).
Do not install in vibrating walls.
Warning
! When using the RSA version, extension lines with a C/D interface must only be in-
stalled indoors. Only regular extensions (without a C/D interface) can be installed
outdoors.
Note 1: See Section Configurations HiPath 1100 on page 2-27 for more information
regarding system configurations.

Installation
Unpacking system components
4.4 Unpacking system components
Procedure
Step Procedure
1. Check to see that all components listed on the receipt are included in the package.
2. Inspect all items for any damage that may have occurred during transportation. If
any damage occurred, report it immediately to the place of purchase.
3. Discard packaging materials according to national environmental regulations.
Warning
! Use only equipment and systems that are in perfect condition. Never operate a dam-
aged system.
4.5 Getting to know your systems
4.5.1 HiPath 1120
Dimensions of the HiPath 1120
Figure 4-1 Dimensions of the HiPath 1120

Installation
Getting to know your systems
Opening the Main Distribution Frame
Figure 4-2 Opening the HiPath 1120 Main Distribution Frame
Location of components
Figure 4-3 System installation overview HiPath 1120

Installation
4.5.2 HiPath 1150
Dimensions of the HiPath 1150
Figure 4-4 Dimensions of the HiPath 1150
Figure 4-5 System installation overview HiPath 1150

Installation
Opening the Main Distribution Frame
Figure 4-6 Opening the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame

Installation
4.5.3 HiPath 1190/1190R

The HiPath 1190 and HiPath 1190R systems are identical, except for a side tab on the HiPath
1190R model, which is used for attaching a 19 rack, and the fact that there are no side covers.
Dimensions HiPath 1190/1190R
Figure 4-7 Dimensions of the HiPath 1190/1190R
Opening the system cabinet
Figure 4-8 Opening the HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
Procedure for opening the cabinet
Step Procedure
1. Insert screwdriver as shown above.
2. Use the screwdriver as shown to remove the cover.
Figure 4-9 HiPath 1190/1190R front view

Installation
Protective cover
AC input sockets
Figure 4-10 HiPath 1190/1190R back view

Installation
Figure 4-11 HiPath 1190/1190R cable anchors
Figure 4-12 Installing modules on the HiPath 1190/1190R systems

Installation
module installation procedure
Step Procedure
1. Insert module into the appropriate slot.
2. Move the latch to the right to secure each module in place.
3. Secure each latch using the screws.
4. Use the reverse procedure to remove the modules.
Installation on a 19" Rack
Figure 4-13 Installing the HiPath 1190R on a 19" rack
Rack-Mounting Procedure
Step Procedure
1. Install the systems brackets on the 19" rack using the screws as shown.
2. Insert the switch into the 19" rack.
3. Secure the switch on the 19" rack using the screws.

Installation
HiPath1120/1150 wall mounting instructions
4.6 HiPath1120/1150 wall mounting instructions
Step Procedure
1. Drill a hole in the wall at a height of 4.10 ft from the floor.
2. Place the bushing over the hole then insert the screw and tighten it until only 0.19"
protrude.
3. Hang the system at the top of , on the screw (see figure 4-14 and figure 4-15).
4. Mark additional holes for washers and remove the system.
5. Drill the remaining holes as marked, install washers and screws then tighten them
letting 0.19" protrude.
6. Hang the system again and align it by tightening the lower screws.
Back of the enclosures
Figure 4-14 Installing the HiPath 1120

Installation
Installing modules
Figure 4-15 Installing the HiPath 1150
4.7 Installing modules
4.7.1 Configuring the HiPath 1100

For each configuration, please consider capacities, availability of modules and their respective
features and requirements (see System expansion limitations on page 2-30).
To help you configure the systems, we suggest that you use the Service Manual, the HiPath
1100 Manager, in off-line mode, to obtain a visual illustration of the module locations and
external lines and the resulting numbering plan (see Help - Advanced Configuration/PABX
Information for further information).
4.7.2 Location of the modules
Installation information
The MB and the modules in the HiPath 1120 system are interconnected with a flatcable (they
must be passed through the ferrite provided) and/or a pin bar. In the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
systems, the modules are interconnected through the backplane connector
For information on expansions and system settings, see System expansion limitations on
page 2-30.

Installation
Installing modules
Warning
! Insert modules only when the power supply is turned OFF.
4.7.2.1 In the HiPath 1120
Figure 4-16 Location of modules on HiPath 1120

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.2.2 On the HiPath 1150
Figure 4-17 Location of modules on HiPath 1150
Table 4-2 shows the modules and the slots where they can be installed with respect to each
systems limitations.
HiPath 1150
Slot 1 Type of Slot 2 Type of module
module
EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
Expansion modules Expansion modules
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
Optional modules UP0/E module Optional modules UP0/E module
Slot 3 Type of Slot 4 Type of module
module

Installation
Installing modules
EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
S0 module LAN interface
module
LAN interface
Optional modules Optional modules
module
TME1 module
Table 4-2 Slot / type of module for the HiPath 1150
4.7.2.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Figure 4-18 Location of modules on HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
Installing modules
Table 4-3 shows the modules and their slots on HiPath 1190 andHiPath 1190R (see System
expansion limitations on page 2-30):
Slot 1 Type of module Slot 2 Type of module

EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
S0 module LAN interface module
Optional modules Optional modules
TME1 module
Slot 3 Type of module Slot 4 Type of module
EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
Optional modules UP0/E module Optional modules UP0/E module
Position 5 Type of module Slots 6 and 7 Type of module
EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800

Installation
Installing modules
Position 8 Type of module Slots 9 and 10 Type of module

EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 210 EB 210
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
Position 11 Type of module Position 12 Type of module
EB 010 EB 010
EB 012 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
Expansion modules
EB 210 EB 210
Expansion modules
EB 200 EB 200
EB 400 EB 400
EB 800 EB 800
S0 module
Optional modules
TME1 module
slot 13 and 14 Type of module Position 15 Type of module
EB 010
EB 010 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 200 EB 210
EB 400 EB 200
EB 800 EB 400
EB 800

Installation
Installing modules
Slots 16 and 17 Type of module Position 18 Type of module

EB 010
EB 010 EB 012
EB 202 EB 202
EB 206 EB 206
EB 200 EB 210
EB 400 EB 200
EB 800 EB 400
EB 800
Slots 19 and 20 Type of module
EB 010
EB 202
EB 206
Expansion modules
EB 200
EB 400
EB 800
Table 4-3 Slot / type of module on HiPath 1190/1190R systems
Note: The CD module and the CPU have fixed slots on the HiPath 1190/1190R systems. They
can be seen on the Modules Latch (Figure 4-18 on page 4-141).

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.3 Installing modules
Step Procedure
1. Turn off the power supply.
2. Remove the systems cover
3. Insert the module into one of the slots shown in figure 4-16.
4. Underside: To install the LAN Interface Module or Music Module, lift the top part
(MB) of the system and use the pin bar to connect with X1 position of the LAN
Interface Module (see figure 3-24) or X2 position of the Music Module (see figure 3-
31).
5. Top side: Interconnect the module and the MB using the flat cable/s provided, taking
care to pass it through the ferrite (see figure 4-16).
6. Connect to the modules MDF Connectors (see figure 4-39).
7. Reassemble the entire set.
8. Performing a visual inspection on page 4-189.
9. Turn on the power supply.
10. Configure the required data (see Configuring the system specifically for the client
on page 6-205).
11.* Using Manager application go to: Advanced tab, > PBX Information tab, > Slot
Allocation tab;
Select the Clear All Slots checkbox;
Update the HiPath System;
Reset the HiPath System.
* This is necessary only if you have changed the type of the modules installed in your system.

Installation
Installing modules
Step Procedure
1. Remove the power supply.
2. Remove the backplane.
3. Insert the module into one of the slots shown in figure 4-17.
4. Connect to the modules MDF Connectors (see Figure 4-40).
8. Configure the required data (see Operation on page 7-278).
Allocation tab;

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.3.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Step Procedure
2. Remove the systems front cover.
3. Remove the systems back cover.
4. Move the modules latch as shown in figure 4-12.
5. Insert the module into one of the slots shown in Table 4-2.
6. Move the modules latch back to secure module.
7. Connect the Main Distribution Frame cables as follows: For modules allocated to the
systems bottom slots (slots 1 to 10) use the bottom opening (see figure 4-10). For
modules allocated to the systems top slots (slots 11 to 20) route the cables through
the top anchors (See figure 4-11).
8. Connect to the appropriate module Connectors (see Expansion modules (EB) on
page 3-58).
9. Attach cables to anchors using plastic brackets.
Allocation tab;

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.4 Installing a TME1 module
Warning
! Do not touch the administration serial interface Connector of the TME1 module be-
fore disconnecting all analog extensions and external line Connectors. Failure to fol-
low this procedure may expose the user to dangerous voltages. The TME1 module
interconnecting cables and Connectors should only be handled by qualified technical
personnel.
Remember to set the DIP switches (See TME1 module on page 3-69).
Assembly Diagram on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Figure 4-19 Installing a TME1 module

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.5 ADSL Connection in the LAN interface modules
4.7.5.1 ADSL module
Connection procedure
Step Procedure
1. Connect the carriers ADSL line to slot 1 and 2 of the X2 Connector.
2. Connect slots 3 and 4 of the X2 Connector to the external line input for the HiPath
1100.
3. Connect your network cables to the HUB (J3, J5, J6 and J7 Connectors).
Connection procedure
Step Procedure
1. Connect the carriers ADSL line to slot 1 and 2 of the X11.
2. Connect slots 3 and 4 of the X11 Connector to the external line input of the HiPath
1100.
3. Connect the cables of your network PCs to the HUB (X2, X3, X4 and X5
Connectors).

Installation
Installing modules
Connections diagram on the HiPath 1120
Figure 4-20 ADSL Connection on the HiPath 1120

Installation
Installing modules
Connections diagram on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Figure 4-21 ADSL Connection on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
4.7.6 Installing a Baby Board ADSL module
Step Procedure
1. Select the SLIMC module.
2. Attach the separators provided with the module.
3. Attach the Baby Board ADSL module to the separators.
4. Connect the cable of the Ethernet Interface to the X6 Connectors.
5. Connect the cable of the ADSL line to the X14 Connectors.
6. Connect the power cable of the module Baby Board ADSL to the X7 Connectors.

Installation
Installing modules
Assembly Diagram
X14
X6
X7
X14
X6
X7
Figure 4-22 Installing a Baby Board ADSLmodule HiPath 1120
4.7.6.2 On the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
Step Procedure
1. Select the LIMC module.
2. Attach the separators provided with the module.
3. Attach the Baby Board ADSL module to the separators.
4. Connect the cable of the Ethernet Interface to the X6 Connectors.
5. Connect the cable of the ADSL line to the X14 Connectors.
6. Connect the power cable of the module Baby Board ADSL to the X7 Connectors.

Installation
Installing modules
Assembly Diagram
X14
X6
X7
X14
X6
X7
Figure 4-23 Installation module Baby Board ADSL on the HiPath1150/1190/1190R
4.7.7 Installing an EVM module
Step Procedure
3. Attach the separator provided with the module to the MB.
4. Attach the module to the MBs pin Connector and to the separator.

Installation
Installing modules
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-24 Installing an EVM module HiPath 1120
Step Procedure
2. Remove the Main Distribution Frames cover.
4. Remove the slots above the MB.

Installation
Installing modules
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-25 Installing an EVM module HiPath 1150
4.7.7.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Step Procedure
3. Disconnect the Main Distribution Frames cables from the MB.
5. Remove the MB.
6. Attach the separator provided with the EVM module to the MB.
8. Insert the MB into the system.
9. Move the module latch back to secure module.
10. Connect the Main Distribution Frames cables.

Installation
Installing modules
Step Procedure
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-26 Installing an EVM module on the HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.8 Installing a Baby Board VCC module

(Voltage Conditioner Circuitry)
Step Procedure
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-27 Installing a Baby Board VCC module on the HiPath 1120

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.9 Installing a CTR- UP0/E module
Step Procedure
3. Attach the module to the corresponding Connector on the MB
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-28 Installing a CTR- UP0/E HiPath 1120 module

Installation
Installing modules

Step Procedure
2. Remove the Main Distribution Frames cover.
4. Remove the slots above the MB.
5. Attach the module to the corresponding Connector on the MB
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-29 Installing a CTR- UP0/E HiPath 1150 module

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.9.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Step Procedure
3. Disconnect the Main Distribution Frames cables from the MB.
5. Remove the MB.
6. Attach the module to the corresponding Connector on the CPU
7. Insert the MB into the system.
8. Move the module latch back to secure module.
9. Connect the Main Distribution Frames cables.
Assembly Diagram
Figure 4-30 Installing a CTR- UP0/E module on the HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
Installing modules
4.7.10 Installing a Music module
Step Procedure
3. Raise the systems top slot (MB).
4. Insert the module in the slot shown on figure 4-31.
5. Attach the MB to the module.
6. Make the connections to the appropriate module Connector (See Music module
on page 3-91).
Assembly Diagram

Installation
Installing modules
Figure 4-31 Installing a Music module HiPath 1120

Installation
Installing the power supply
4.8 Installing the power supply
Introduction
Before connecting the power supply to the system, see Technical Data on page 2-
38 and Power Supply Unit (PSU) on page 3-93.
4.8.1 On the HiPath 1120
Step Procedure
1. Check network voltage
2. If the voltage is within the power supplys voltage range, connect the power supply.
3. Performing a visual inspection on page 4-189
Warning
! Use the cable of the power supply to turn system power on or off.
Figure 4-32 Installing a power supply on the HiPath 1120

Installation
4.8.2 On the HiPath 1150
Step Procedure
2. Install the ferrite (C39022-Z7000-C7) in the AC power cable of the PSU at most 20
mm from the female connector (see Figure 4-35 on page 4-165).
3. If the voltage is within the power supplys voltage range, connect the power supply.
4. If the power supply has a battery input socket (BBU) or if you have acquired the BBU
extension kit (S30817-H853-B401-*), please connect them as indicated in
Installing the batteries on page 4-169.
5. Performing a visual inspection on page 4-189
Warning
! Use the cable of the power supply to turn system power on or off. If batteries are
installed, they should also be turned on or off.
Power supply
Figure 4-33 Installing the PSU HiPath 1150

Installation
Batteries
2 x 12V
(in series)
Interconnect cable
PSU - Interconnect cable
Interconnect cable with batteries
with batteries
Figure 4-34 Installation of the PSU HiPath 1150 with BBU
20 mm at most
Figure 4-35 Power cable of the PSU with BBU - HiPath 1150

Installation
4.8.3 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Step Procedure
2. Remove the systems back cover.
3. If the voltage is within the power supplys range, insert the power supply into the
slots shown in figure 4-36.
Warning:
All power supplies must be of the same model (with or without batteries).
4. Pass the power supply connectors through the openings in the back of the system
(see figure 4-9).
5. Install the ferrite (C39022-Z7000-C7) in the AC power cable of each PSU at most
20 mm from the female connector (see Figure 4-37 on page 4-168).
6. If the power supply has a battery input socket (BBU) or if you have acquired the BBU
extension kit (Full - S30777-H770-H410-*, Medium - S30777-H770-H420-*):
Connect the cables indicated in the figure 3-34 into the first power supply
and fix it to the chassis (see figure 4-37), then proceed in the same way by
interconnecting the remaining power supplies using the Vshare
interconnect cable, the interconnect cable between the PSU and fix
them to the chassis.
Vshare interconnect cable;
PSU interconnect cable - battery cable;
Interconnect cable between PSUs
AC power supply cable (with ferrites)
(Battery connection kit (BBU)- L30251-U600-A617)
Interconnect the batteries as indicated in Installing the batteries on page
4-169.
7. Connect the AC cables of the power supplies to the AC output of the chassis as
indicated in figure 4-10
8. Plug the systems AC cable into the AC input on the power supply (see figure 3-34).
9. Replace the protective cover on the power supplies AC input on the chassis (see
figure 4-10).

Installation
Warning
! Before powering up the system, ensure that the chassis is properly grounded. Turn
system power on or off by using the switch located on the systems AC input.
Connecting to the
power supply
for backplanes
Protective cover
AC input sockets
Figure 4-36 Installing the PSU in the HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
Interconnect cable between Interconnect cable

PSUs PSU - Cable for
connection with the
batteries
Vshare cable
Interconnect cable
betweenPSUs
20 mm at most
Ferrites
Protective cover
AC input sockets
Batteries
2 x 12V
(in series)
Interconnect cable
with batteries
Interconnect cable
PSU - Cable for
connection
with batteries
Figure 4-37 Installing the PSU with BBU in the HiPath 1190/1190R

Installation
4.8.4 Installing the batteries

Two 12V batteries are required in HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems, which must be linked in
series by a cable with female faston connectors at each end (Battery connection kit (BBU)-
L30251-U600-A617).
Note: The power supply used in the systems must have a battery connection socket (see
Power Supply Unit (PSU) on page 3-93) and must use the required interconnect cable (
Battery interconnect cables (BBU) on page 3-122).
Caution
Batteries
2 x 12V
(in series)
Fuse
7.5A (uniVAL - manufactured by MTA)
Interconnect cable PSU-

for battery
Connect to the battery cable

of the PSU
Figure 4-38 Connecting batteries to the system.

Installation
Connections to the systems MDF
4.9 Connections to the systems MDF
Introduction
Attach cables to the systems Main Distribution Frame and route them through the conduits and
openings to reach the carriers main telephone distribution cabinet. Below are some examples
of configurations.
4.9.1 HiPath 1120
Example
*The installation of a KS type system telephone requires a CD pair in conjunction with an A/B extension slot (see
Installing telephone terminals on page 4-186).
Figure 4-39 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1120 MDF
Warning
! When using the RSA version, extension lines with a C/D interface must only be in-
stalled indoors. Only regular extensions (without a C/D interface) can be installed
outdoors.

Installation
When using Expansion module UP0/E, KS type system telephones will be disabled
Posi- Position Position

Position Internal #
Slot tion of Internal # Slot of the of the
of the extension EB 204 module
the trunk exten-
01 801 Position 03 803
MB
02 802 1 04 804
1 11 9 19
2 12 10 20
A/B
3 13 11 21
4 14 12 22
A/B
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
Position Position
Internal #
Slot of the of the
EB 204 module
trunk extension
05 805
Position 2
06 806
13 23
14 24
A/B
15 25
16 26
Table 4-4 Example of the location of extensions on the HiPath 1120 Main Distribution
Frame

Installation
4.9.2 HiPath 1150
Example
*The installation of a system telephone requires a CD pair in conjunction with an A/B exten-
sion slot (see Installing telephone terminals on page 4-186).
Figure 4-40 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame
To access the inside of the Main Distribution Frame, remove the safety latch using a small
screwdriver (See figure 4-6). After completing the procedure on the systems Main Distribution
Frame, replace the safety latch.
External Exten-
Slot Internal #
Line # sion slot
01 801
MB
02 802

Installation
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
A/B
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Internal # Internal # Internal Internal # Internal # Internal #
External Exten-
Slot EB 210 EB 206 module Module EB 400 EB 800
Line # sion slot
module module number EB 200 module module
03 803 803 803 803 803 803
Position 1
04 804 804 804 804 804 804
11 21 21 21 805 805
12 22 22 22 806 806
13 23 23 807
14 24 24 808
15 25 25 809
A/B
16 26 26 810
17 27
18 28
19 29
20 30

Installation
Internal # Internal # EB 202 Internal # Internal #

External Exten-
Slot EB 210 EB 206 module EB 200 EB 400
Line # sion slot
module module Internal # module module
Position 2 05 805 805 805 805 807
06 806 806 806 806 808
21 31 27 23 809
22 32 28 24 810
23 33 29
24 34 30
25 35 31
A/B
26 36 32
27 37
28 38
29 39
30 40
Internal # Internal # EB 202 Internal #
External Exten-
Slot EB 210 EB 206 module EB 200
Line # sion slot
module module Internal # module
07 807 807 807 807
Position 3
08 808 808 808 808
31 41 33 25
32 42 34 26
33 43 35
34 44 36
35 45 37
A/B
36 46 38
37 47
38 48
39 49
40 50

Installation
Internal # Internal # EB 202 Internal #

External Exten-
Slot EB 210 EB 206 module EB 200
Line # sion slot
module module Internal # module
Position 4 09 809 809 809 809
10 810 810 810 810
41 51 39 27
42 52 40 28
43 53 41
44 54 42
45 55 43
A/B
46 56 44
47 57
48 58
49 59
50 60
Table 4-5 Example of extension locations on the HiPath 1150 Main Distribution Frame
4.9.3 HiPath 1190/1190R
Warning
! On the HiPath 1190, trunks and extensions lines must be routed to use the shortest
path inside the cabinet.
Example
Due to the flexibility of the HiPath 1190 systems, the configuration of expansion and optional
modules can vary according to each clients needs. Here is an example of a possible
configuration:
For a system with a TME1 module in slot 1 and an EB 012 module in slot 3. The Main
Distribution Frame would be configured as follows:
External digital Analog extension

Module Slot Internal #
line # position
TME1 Position 1 01 to 30 --- 801 to 830
EB 012 Position 3 --- 1 to 12 101 to 112
Table 4-6 Example of extension locations on the Main Distribution Frame

Installation
*The installation of a system telephone requires a CD pair in conjunction with an A/B exten-
sion slot (see Installing telephone terminals on page 4-186).
Figure 4-41 Distribution of extensions on the HiPath 1190/1190R Main Distribution Frame
Warning
! When the S0 module is used, the default number of the modules is changed.

Installation
Installing a V.24 Interface
4.10 Installing a V.24 Interface
Introduction
To connect a computer/printer/modem to the HiPath 1100 using the RS 232 serial interface, you
must use the V.24 adapter cable (see V.24 Adapter Cable on page 3-113). If it is necessary
to use another serial cable as an extension to connect the computer/printer/modem to the
HiPath 1100, the maximum total length should not exceed 15 metres.
This interface allows you to use some applications developed specifically for configuring and
managing user features.
Connections
Step Procedure
1. Attach the end of the interface interface cable with the Mini DIN Connector (male) to
the MBs serial Mini DIN Connector . Attach the other end to the printer or PC serial
port. When connecting to a PC, make sure that either the COM 1 or COM 2 port is
available.
2. The following parameters can be configured when using a PC:
9600 / 14400 / 19200 (default) / 38400 / 56000 / 57600 / 115200 /128000 /
256000 baud
Fixed settings:
8 Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
3. When connecting to a printer, make sure the current time at the PABX is set
correctly.
Note
! When using a LAN interface module, do not use the MBs serial Connector since the
serial connection is assigned to the HiPath 1100 module All functions of the serial
port are now executed over the LAN.

Installation
Installing a USB Interface
4.11 Installing a USB Interface
Introduction
To connect a PC to the HiPath 1100 using a USB interface you must have a USB adapter cable
(see USB adapter cable on page 3-116). This interface allows you to use certain applications
developed specifically for configuring and managing user features.
Warning
! The installation drivers are on the Setup and Installation CD.
4.11.1 On the HiPath1120/1150
Figure 4-42 Illustration of USB cable connection
Connections
Step Procedure
1. Plug the USB adapter cable (with the male Mini DIN Connector) into the 4-pin Mini
DIN Connector on the motherboard (Figure 4-42).
2. Connect the A to B Standard end of the USB cable to the USB adapter, and connect
the other end to the computer or modem.

Installation
Installing a USB Interface
Step Procedure
3. See System Programming Mode in the System programming mode using a PC on
page 7-280.
4.11.2 On the HiPath 1190/1190R
Figure 4-43 Illustration of USB cable connection on HiPath 1190
Connections
Step Procedure
1. Plug the USB adapter cable (with the male Mini DIN Connector) into the 4-pin Mini
DIN Connector on the motherboard (Figure 4-43).
2. Connect the A to B Standard end of the USB cable to the USB adapter, and connect
the other end to the computer or modem.
3. See System Programming Mode in the System programming mode using a PC on
page 7-280.

Installation
Installing an external Audio Source
4.12 Installing an external Audio Source

The HiPath 1100 systems provide connections for audio devices, such as radios, tuners, CD,
MD, and others.
HiPath 1120
The audio source must be connected to a music optional module using an RCA Connector
in slot X1 (see Figure 4-39 on page 4-170).
HiPath1150/1190/1190R
The audio source must be connected to the MB on slot X8.
Pins 3 and 4 for HiPath 1150 (See Figure 4-40 on page 4-172).
Pins 1 and 2 for HiPath 1190/1190R (See Figure 4-41 on page 4-176).
4.13 Installing a TFE - entrance telephone interface
4.13.1 Models: S30817-K930-A300 and S30122-K7696-T313

S30817-K930-A300 (without amplifier)
S30122-K7696-T313 (with amplifier)
Installation procedures
Step Procedure
1. Connect your system to the TFE interface, see Internal entrance telephone with
TFE interface on page 3-103.
2. Connect the entrance telephone to the TFE interface

Installation
Installing a TFE - entrance telephone interface
4.13.2 Model S30817-Q936-C282 - Brazil
This interface can be configured to work in pager or entrance telephone mode.
Pager mode
Step Procedure
1. Set jumper 1 (J1) to ON and jumper 2 (J2) to OFF (see Internal entrance telephone
with TFE interface on page 3-103).
2. Configure the system for entrance telephone mode and specify the extensions for
answering calls. Specify also at which extension the interface will be installed.
3. Connect the interface to the entrance telephone extension by using contacts 1 and
2 on the X2 Connector.
4. To activate Pager mode, lift the handset at one of the answering extensions and dial
the entrance telephone number. Once the appropriate number is dialed, the calling
extension is connected to the entrance telephone, but without voice capability.
5. For voice capability, dial 8. The ambient sound will stop and you will be able to
leave a message. The sound will be amplified in all speakers connected to the
amplifier.
6. To disable voice capability, dial 9. If the sound is not disabled manually, it will
timeout automatically after 15 seconds. To enable the automatic timeout, set jumper
3 (J3) to OFF.
The length of the cables between the X2 Connector and the PABX must not exceed
32.8 feet.

Installation
Recommendations concerning the Power Supply and Protection of the System
Entrance telephone mode
Step Procedure
1. Set jumper 1 (J1) to OFF (see Internal entrance telephone with TFE interface on
page 3-103).
2. Configure the system for entrance telephone mode and specify the extensions for
answering calls. Specify also at which extension the interface will be installed.
3. Connect the interface to the entrance telephone extension by using contacts 1 and
2 on the X2 Connector.
4. Connect the entrance telephone to contacts 3 and 4 on the X6 Connector, wiring it
as instructed by the manufacturer.
5. When the person at the door presses the entrance telephone button, it causes it to
ring at extensions configured for answering calls.
When an extension answers the call, the voice capability is automatically enabled.
6. Dial the code for the door opener.
7. To disable voice capability the attendant extension must dial 9.
To enable voice again the attendant extension must dial 5.
If the sound is not disable manually, it will automatically timeout after 5 minutes.
4.14 Recommendations concerning the Power Supply and Protection

of the System
Instructions for solving possible ground return problems
To avoid ground return signals from remote systems use the same phase for the dif-
ferent systems power supply.
If the characteristics of the building make this impossible, use an intermediate trans-
former to detach the external system so that damage may be avoided during oper-
ation.

Installation
Protective ground connection
Danger
! The HiPath1150/1190/1190R power supplies must be protected by an earth ground
in a separate safety ground conductor (PE - green/yellow) (TN-S system, minimum
section = 2.5 mm2) as shown in figure 4-44.
Any additional servicing of low voltage networks (100 - 240 V AC) must be done by
qualified technical personnel only.
Do not use as a grounding point:
- Central heating systems
- Sewer systems
- Ground wire for aerial systems.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may lead to hazardous conditions.
Example of a power supply configuration for the HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems
L1 N PE
HiPath1150/1190/1190R
127 Vac
Figure 4-44 Diagram of power supply configuration for the HiPath1150/1190/1190R

Systems
4.14.1 Protection of external lines and extensions

The primary protection of external lines and extensions must be provided by grounding the
system through a separate cable (minimum section = 2.5 mm 2) set up exclusively for the
protection of the telephone system. The secondary protection of external lines and extensions
is between wires A and B.
For primary protection for a distribution box that is external to the PABX use a MPT250 shield
with two PTCs (A and B wires) for overcurrent protection along with a gas capsule connected
to the ground wire through a separate cable that is independent of the cable used for grounding
the power supply.

Installation
The connection between the HiPath 1100 system and the distribution box must be made using
multipair cables, preferably foil shielded. This type of flat cable has a special grounding wire that
must be connected to the safety ground, but only at the distribution box end
.
For the RSA version the primary protection for external lines and extensions must
be provided according to local regulations.
Figure 4-45 Protection and grounding connection diagram
4.14.2 Connecting a safety ground wire

For the safety of the user and the technician the HiPath 1190 system has a dedicated terminal
for grounding its metal enclosure. This terminal is located on the back of the enclosure.
Connecting a ground wire protects the accessible metal parts of the equipment against high
voltage and power levels in the event of a surge or a failure.
The ground connection is critical and must be wired before connecting the system to a power
grid or an internal or external telecommunications network. To make this connection, follow
these guidelines:

Installation
Protective power outage relays
For an indoor environment, use a safety ground conductor (PE) with a cross-section larger
than 2.5 mm2. For an outdoor environment, use a safety ground conductor (PE) with a
cross-section larger than 4 mm2.
The wire insulation should be color-coded yellow and green.
The grounding systems impedance must not exceed 10 Ohms.
When uninstalling the system, the safety ground wire (PE) should be the last one disconnected.
The ground wire connection does not preclude the need to provide functional grounding to the
system using an appropriate power supply circuit (See Power Systems on page 2-26)
.
The ground wire must be connected to the protective ground of the building, never
to water pipes, lightning rods, etc.
Checking the protective ground connection
Procedure
To ensure a proper grounding connection perform the tests described in the table below before
placing the system in service
.
Step Procedure Result

(Rated Value)
1. Measure the ohmic resistance between the ground
< 1 Ohm
connection and the grounding bar.
2. Measure the ohmic resistance between the networks
protective earth ground (PE) and the outlet or the < 1 Ohm
Main Distribution Frame.
3. Measure the ohmic resistance of the outlets neutral
< 10 Ohm
conductor in relation to the earth.
4.15 Protective power outage relays

Each external analog line on the EB 202/204/206/210 modules features a relay that forwards
the line to the first two extension slots on each EB module in the event of a power outage.
Expansion modules EB 200/400/800 do not feature protective relays.

Installation
System cabling
4.16 System cabling
Introduction
The connection between the extensions and the system is provided with cables as follows:
Color group Pair A Wire B Wire Color group Pair A Wire B Wire
1 wt/blu blu/wt 11 blk/blu blu/blk
2 wt/or or/wt 12 blk/or or/blk
1 3 wt/gre gre/wt 3 13 blk/gre gre/blk
4 wt/cob cob/wt 14 blk/cob cob/blk
5 wt/gra gra/wt 15 blk/gra gra/blk
6 red/blu blu/red 4 16 yel/blu blu/yel
7 red/or or/red
2 8 red/gre gre/red
9 red/cob cob/red
10 red/gra gra/red
Table 4-7 Color code for cables
The end of the cable that is attached to the systems Main Distribution Frame uses one of the
Connector types shown in Main Distribution Frame on page 3-100.
4.17 Installing telephone terminals

A System Telephone has four wires (A, B, C, D), two used for voice (A, B), and two for data
(C, D).
An optiPoint-type system telephone has four wires (A, B, C, D), two of which (A, B) are
required for voice communications.
A Standard Telephone (DP/MF) has only two wires (A, B), both used for voice.
Standard Telephones (DP/MF) and optiPoint telephones must be connected to the

HiPath 1100 system using wires A and B only. Do not use wires C and D.

Installation
Installing telephone terminals
Connections
Figure 4-46 Connections for telephone jacks (for Brazil)
Red wire (R) = voice (extensions B wire).

Green wire (G) = voice (extensions A wire).
Black wire (BK) =CD cards C wire (positive in relation to D).
Yellow wire (Y) =CD cards D wire (negative in relation to C).
Step Procedure
1. Install telephone jacks at the extensions.
2. Connect each extension jack to the desired A/B slot on the Main Distribution Frame.
3. KS-type system telephones are preset at factory default for C/D pairs. (see CD
Interface Assignment on page 6-248).
If necessary, choose a different C/D pair, then program the new C/D interface
assignment.
4. Install the telephone sets.

Installation
optiPoint Master/Slave telephone HiPath 1120 connections
Warning
! KS-type system telephones are powered through the C and D wires. Take the nec-
essary precautions to avoid short circuits at the interconnect block. If a short circuit
occurs between wires C and D, the interfaces protection will take the extension out
of service. To activate the extension again, remove the short, disconnect the system
telephone then reconnect it. The interface should then start operating normally.
For 2-wire analog telephone sets (A, B) a momentary short-circuit should not cause any
problem.
The maximum distance for installing a KS-type system telephone using a two-pair cable with a
0.4 mm2 copper wire is 0.3 miles and for standard telephones it is 1.5 miles.
4.18 optiPoint Master/Slave telephone HiPath 1120 connections
Figure 4-47 optiPoint Master/Slave telephone HiPath 1120 connections
Important
! When there are more than 4 optiPoint 500 (Master or Slave) telephones on the Hi-
Path 1120 system, an additional power supply must be used. (see Chapter 3, List
of modules).

Installation
Performing a visual inspection
4.19 Performing a visual inspection
Introduction
Before starting up the system, perform a visual inspection of all hardware, cables and power
supply. This procedure should be performed with the entire system turned OFF.
.
Warning
! Check whether all AC and DC connections of the cables, modules and chassis of the
HiPath 1100 are correctly and properly connected before connecting the client inter-
face.
Warning
! Before starting to work on the HiPath 1190, make sure the system is grounded and
disconnected from all power sources.
Follow all guidelines to protect the system from electrostatic discharge (see Safety
Information: Caution on page 1-21).
Visual inspection procedure
Step Procedure Help/ Measurements

Notes
1. Compare the installation position of Module installation Make the appropriate
modules on the slots against the diagram. corrections
installation diagram. to the modules and notify
the person in charge.
2. Check to see that all modules are See System Data Attach or secure modules
securely and properly attached. on page 2-26. as needed.
3. Check the networks line voltage. Multimeter. Verify voltage at power
source.
Table 4-8 Visual inspection procedure

Installation
Performing a visual inspection

Telephones
Overview
5 Telephones
This chapter describes the characteristics of KS-type system telephones, optiPoint 500 and
standard telephones (DP/DTMF)
5.1 Overview
Topic Page
System Telephones
Profiset 3030 System Telephone 5-192
E822 ST System telephone 5-193
E821 ST System Telephone (for Brazil only) 5-195
optiPoint 500 System Telephones 5-196
Programmable Feature Keys 5-203
Settings 5-204
Common telephones
Dial Pulse (DP) Telephone 5-204
Dual Tone Multifrequency Telephone (MF) 5-204
5.2 System Telephones

System telephones are designed exclusively for HiPath 1100 systems. In addition to special
features, system telephones allow direct access to some PABX facilities while providing special
features for tracking extension and external line status by means of indications from a set of
programmable keys.
The programming for the system is described in Chapter 6, Configuring the system specifically
for the client.
For system telephones without a display, only the "Store key number" can be pro-
grammed using the keypad (see the User Manual). Other functions can only be pro-
grammed using the HiPath 1100 Manager.

Telephones
System Telephones
5.2.1 Keys
Status keys
On optiPoint 500, Profiset 3030, E821 ST and E822 ST telephones, these keys display
extension, external line and features/facilities status through a series of blinking LED patterns.
.
Symbol Description
LED Key OFF: Extension or external light free or function disabled.
LED key ON: Extension or external line busy or function enabled.
Blinking LED key: Incoming call or recall ringing.
5.2.2 Profiset 3030 System Telephone

This telephone features a display with the lines:
The first line displays time and date.
The second line displays information such as the number of the extension called and
system messages.
The third line displays the extension number and system messages pertaining to feature
selection options.
When the ">" or "<" symbol appears next to the line, it means there are additional selection
options. Use the navigation keys to scroll through the available options. Press Enter to
select an option.
When the " " or " " symbol appears next to the line, it means there are additional lines
to be displayed. Select the Menu key to access the next line or the previous line.

Telephones
System Telephones
Profiset 3030 telephone layout
Figure 5-1 Profiset 3030 System telephone layout
1. Handset cradle
2. Function keys
3. Programmable keys with status LEDs.
4. Speakerphone speaker
5. Microphone for speakerphone
6. Display.
5.2.3 E822 ST System telephone

The E822 ST System telephone features a 2-line, 16-character alphanumeric display.
This system telephone features a 2-line display:
The first line displays time, date, day of the week, number of the extension called, and
number of system messages.
The second line displays the extension number and system messages pertaining to
feature selection options.

Telephones
System Telephones
If the ">" appears on the right, it means there are more options available. Use the arrow
keys to navigate through the options. Press Enter to select an option.
E822 ST System telephone layout
3 5 4 2
Figure 5-2 E822 ST system telephone layout
1. Alphanumeric LCD display

2. Programmable status indication LED keys
3. Function Keys
4. SPEAKER (Speakerphone) Key). The speakerphone is disabled when the handset is
lifted. To switch from speakerphone to normal mode, lift the handset and press the
SPEAKER key.

Telephones
System Telephones
5.2.4 E821 ST System Telephone (for Brazil only)

This telephone features keys for direct access to TOGGLE, PICK UP and CONFERENCE
facilities. It also features programmable keys for extensions and external lines.
E821 ST System Telephone Layout
3 2 1
Figure 5-3 E821 ST system telephone layout
1. Programmable status indication LED keys

2. Special function keys
3. End Call key for use with a headset.

Telephones
System Telephones
5.2.5 optiPoint 500 System Telephones

optiPoint 500 Advance and Economy/Basic/Standard System Telephones feature a 2-line, 24-
character per line alphanumeric display where:
Line 1 displays time, date, requests, error alerts and confirmation messages, as
appropriate.
Line 2 displays the internal number, system name, and function selection options that can
be selected by pressing :. If the ">" appears on the right, it means there are more options
available. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the options. Press Enter to select an
option <>.
Important
! When there are more than 4 optiPoint 500 (Master or Slave) telephones on the Hi-
Path 1120 system, an additional power supply must be used. (See Chapter 3, List
of modules).
optiPoint 500 advance telephone layout
1
11 2
3
4
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 5-4 optiPoint 500 advance System telephone layout

Telephones
System Telephones
optiPoint 500 economy/basic/standard telephone layout
1
11 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 5-5 optiPoint 500 economy/basic/standard system telephone layout

Telephones
System Telephones
optiPoint 500 entry telephone layout
11
1/5
2
3
8
9
Figure 5-6 optiPoint 500 entry System Telephone Layout
1. Key labels preset Function keys: Service menu, redial, microphone ON/OFF or internal,
speakerphone.
2. Keypad
3. Handset
4. This telephone features a 4-line, 24-character-per-line backlit display
5. Key labels - Programmable keys
6. Key for confirming a function
7. Keys for selecting a function
8. Keys for configuring the telephone set
9. LEDs
10. Microphone for speakerphone

Telephones
System Telephones
11. Speakerphone and call tone speaker.

12. optiPoint key module or optiPoint BLF or optiPoint memory module with freely
programmable keys and specific functions.
On the optiPoint 500 Entry model, the preset function keys field (1) can be pro-
grammed as desired (5).
optiPoint 500 rear panel
PC (USB)
Headset
HiPath 1100
Handset
optiPoint key module or

optiPoint BLF or
optiPoint memory module
optiPoint adapter
Figure 5-7 optiPoint 500 rear panel

Telephones
System Telephones
optiPoint 500 Properties and Connection Options
optiPoint 500* economy basic standard advance

Function keys 12 12 12 20
Full-duplex speakerphone feature - - Yes Yes
Lighted display - - - Yes
Headphone connected using:
Integrated interface - - - Yes
Adapter - Yes Yes Yes
Handset Interface Yes Yes Yes Yes
USB Interface - Yes Yes Yes
Additional connection interface) - Yes Yes Yes
Adapter slots 0 1 1 2
* The name and type are printed on the bottom of the optiPoint 500 telephone set.
Terminals, adapters and accessories

Using options improves performance and provides more comfort for users while performing
their jobs.
Additional optiPoint terminals:

1
Additional terminals provide more comfort and
improve efficiency and safety at work.
Supported additional terminals include:
1. optiPoint memory module;
2. optiPoint key module;
2 3. optiPoint BLF.
Note: Up to 2 optiPoint BLFs may be connected per

system

Telephones
System Telephones
Additional optiPoint terminals:

Additional terminals provide more comfort and
improve efficiency and safety at work.
Supported additional terminals include: optiPoint
key module, optiPoint memory module.
optiPoint adapters:
Expand telephone features through different
adapters for connecting different system
telephones, ISDN or analog telephones, headsets
or speakers. Supported adapters include: optiPoint
acoustic adapter, optiPoint analog adapter,
optiPoint ISDN adapter and optiPoint phone
adapter.
Headset:
The headset can be used to replace the terminals
handset for hands-Free operation.
Warning:
For information on installation, related issues and
operation, please see the headsets installation
manual.
Additional microphone:
Designed for use with a speakerphone in
environments with poor acoustical quality.
Connection requires an optiPoint acoustic adapter.

Telephones
System Telephones
External speaker:
Improves reception quality when using a speaker/
speakerphone. Ideal for conferences.
Connection requires an optiPoint acoustic adapter.
Table 5-1 Terminals, adapters and accessories for optiPoint 500
Considerations on headsets
Models with electronic hook control (such as Siemens Elipse 1.8 EHS and GN Netcom 9120)
for answering calls using a headset must use an optiPoint Acoustic Adapter, regardless of the
optiPoint model used. optiPoint Advanced features include a built-in headset interface.
However, an optiPoint Acoustic Adapter is required for connecting the headset. When an
optiPoint key is configured for using a headset (optional setting, the system behaves as if a
headset is connected. Therefore, it is recommended that when you disconnect the headset you
change the key configuration accordingly.
If you want to use a Siemens Elipse 1.8 EHS or GN Netcom 9120 set without the electronic
hook control switch, you must use an optiPoint Acoustic Adapter for optiPoint Entry, Basic and
Standard models. For the optiPoint Advanced, an optiPoint Acoustic Adapter is optional. The
headset can be connected to the built-in interface on the telephones rear panel using a RJ45
connector. The Headset feature key must be programmed to answer calls.
Headset models without an electronic hook key (e.g., Plantronics) can be connected directly to
the handsets interface on an optiPoint (Entry, Basic or Standard) telephone, as well as through
an optiPoint Acoustic Adapter or the built-in interface (optiPoint Advanced only). However, in
order to be detected by the system, a Headset key must be programmed, regardless of the
configuration being used.
When an optiPoint key is configured for using a headset (optional setting, the
! system behaves as if a headset is connected. Therefore, when you disconnect
the headset you must change the key configuration accordingly.
For information on how to install headsets for use with optiPoint telephones, see
the headset users manual.

Telephones
System Telephones
5.2.6 Programmable Feature Keys

Programmable keys provide easy access to the most frequently used system features:
Internal calls
External calls
Answering an internal or external call
Consultation (internal or external)
Transfer (internal or external)
Line reservation
Individual pickup
Toggle/Hold
Other (see chapter on programmable keys in the User Manual - Code *91).
optiPoint 500 advance/economy/basic/standard - A31003-K1270-U101-*
Profiset 3030, E 822 and E821 - - A31003-K1270-U102-*
optiPoint 500 Entry - A31003-K1270-U104-*

Telephones
Common telephones
5.2.7 Settings
System telephone settings can be configured individually according to each users preferences.
For further information on how to configure a system telephone, see the manual included with
the unit:
Documentation Number
Profiset 3030 A31003-K1250-B816 -**- 4L19
E821 ST and E822 ST A31003-K1250-B814 -**- 3P19
optiPoint500 A31003-H8400-B988 -**-6Z19
5.3 Common telephones
5.3.1 Dial Pulse (DP) Telephone

Analog telephones, wireless telephones, fax machines and any device that uses pulse dialing).
Procedures for using these types of telephones are outlines following the symbolDP.
5.3.2 Dual Tone Multifrequency Telephone (MF)

Analog telephones, wireless telephones, fax machines and any equipment that uses touch-
tone dialing. This dialing mode is recognized by the dual-tone it generates, which can be heard
by the caller on the handset as the numbers are dialed. Procedures for using these types of
telephones are indicated after the DTMF symbol.
Important
! The Flash feature is valid only for a DTMF telephone, not for DP phones. If you
have a touch-tone telephone (MF) that does not feature a Flash key, placing the
phone on-hook and off-hook momentarily will simulate the action of the Flash key.
NB
! For more information on the operation, features and facilities of system telephones,
refer to the Instructions Manual provided with your telephone.

Configuring the system specifically for the client
Numbering Plan
6 Configuring the system specifically for the client

Procedure Summary
Step System Telephone/Standard MF Telephone HiPath 1100 Manager

1. System programming can only be executed using the Connect the PC to the
systems first extension slot (analog extension (MF) or system.
system telephone).
2. Programming Mode: *95 + PASSWORD (default: 31994). Configure CommServer.
3. Valid parameter or code: beep (Brazil). Start the program.
4. When an incorrect setting is entered: 3 beeps (Brazil). System data are
automatically imported.
5. When completed: 1 beep (Brazil). Start programming.
6. End programming: press # key or replace handset. Export the new
configuration settings.
Table 6-1 Configuration procedure summary
6.1 Numbering Plan

The Numbering Plan is configured based on the modules detected by the system.
Detection HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

1. Motherboard TME1 module 1 Analog modules
2. S0 module Motherboard TME1 module 1
3. Analog modules S0 module S0 module
4. Analog modules
Table 6-2 Detection sequence of the modules

Numbering Plan
Numbering
Description HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

External line 801 to 806 801 to 832 801 to 845
Extension, including S0 11 to 30 11 to 60 101 to 240
610 to 645
Group of external lines 0 or 890 to 899
Call Group (CG) 770 to 779
Hunt Group (HG) 780 to 789
UCD subscriber group 790 to 799
Carrier 9
EVM - Default internal number 790
EVM - Message Ports 7491 and 7492
EVM - Virtual Ports 744 to 747
Fax/DID - Virtual Message Ports 740 to 743
MSN-CAPI Line 10 100

Table 6-3 Numbering Plan
Flexible numbering
The pre-programmed parameters for the system numbering plan, and the features access codes, may have their numbers
changed to fit their communication platform using the HiPath 1100 Manager on page 7-336 management software.

Table of the Systems Programming Codes
6.2 Table of the Systems Programming Codes
Item Programming
1. Main Configurations page 7-208
2. External line settings page 7-210
3. Programming an Extension page 7-212
4. DISA page 7-218
5. General settings page 7-218
6. Updating the Software page 7-222
7. Remote Administration page 7-222
8. Internal entrance telephone page 7-223
9. Call Detail Report Manager page 7-223
10. Fax/DID Feature page 7-226
11. EVM module page 7-228
12. Digital trunk settings page 7-230
13. LAN interface modules page 7-232
14. Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120 page 7-233
Table 6-4 Classification of programming tables
For information on the programming of each feature see Comments about the systems
programming codes on page 6-234

6.2.1 Main Configurations
Programmed Code Intermediate data Data to Completing Default

Functions Program data entry
Default Access to a 002 extension Group of external lines # instead of 0
group of external extension
Lines
Special Class of 096 extension COS - 0 (No Permission) # instead of 0
Service for a COS-1 (Denied List 1) extension
Blocked Extension COS-2 (Denied List 2)
COS-3 (Denied List 3)
COS-4 (Permission List 1 )
COS-5 (Permission List 2)
COS-6 (Permission List 3)
COS-7 (Default for all lines)
COS assignment 111 group of external lines extension # instead of Class - 77 for
Day COS extension all exten-
class - 0 (No Permission) sions.
Class - 1 (Denied List 1) Note:
Class - 2 (Denied List 2) Class - 7 Day
Class - 3 (Denied List 3) Class - 7
Class - 4 (Permission List 1) Night
Class - 5 (Permission List 2)
Class - 7 (default for all lines)
Night service COS:
Class - 1 (Denied List 1)
Class - 7 (Default for all lines)
Phonebook 112 Phonebook entry: Number (up to 20 digits) 5-second time- All entries are
000 to 249* out blank
Dialing Mode on an 119 external analog line 1 - Analog line: Pulse (DP) # instead of 2 - MF
external Analog 2 - Analog line: Multifre- external line
Line quency (MF)
Denied List 123 Class of Service: 1, 2 or 3 + Number (up to 16 digits) 5-second time- See
List 1 - COS 1 - slots 01 to 10 out Table 6-8 on
List 2 - COS 2 - slots 01 to 25 page 6-218
List 3 - COS 3 - slots 01 to 35
Permission List 124 Class of Service: 4, 5 or 6 + Number (up to 16 digits) 5-second time-
List 1- COS 4 - slots 01 to 10 out

Programmed Code Intermediate data Data to Completing Default

Functions Program data entry
Analog Line Atten- 142 External line Up to 10 extensions or call # instead of None
dants + groups or extension
1 - Day service - to delete
2 - Night service
3 - Day service after a specified
time period
4 - Night service after a specified
time
Attendant Console 150 extension or # instead of None
- to delete extension
Permission for 072 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
using Speed Dial # - to disable
numbers without
COS analysis
Language 164 0 - Custom Automatic 3
1 - Portuguese
2 - Spanish
3 - English
4 - French
5 - Italian
6 - Turkish
Country/Group of 165 See Table 6-16 on page 6- Automatic 01 - Brazil
Countries 226
COS changeover 178 extension - to enable # instead of # - disabled
# - to disable extension
Carrier selection 225 - ACS Automatic # - LCR

mode: LCR or # - LCR
ACS**
Warning Tone for 092 - To activate Automatic # - to deacti-
Calls without LCR # - to deactivate vate
To activate the 250 Group of external lines - To activate # instead of # - to deacti-

time for LCR fall- # - to deactivate extension vate
back
Time for LCR fall- 251 05 to 30 seconds Automatic 05 seconds
back
* To dial an external number enter the external line number instead of the external access code "0."
** Settings must be configured on the HiPath 1100 Manager.
Table 6-5 Main Configurations

6.2.2 External line settings
Programmed Code Intermediate data Data to be Completing Default

Functions programmed data entry
Groups of external 156 group of external lines External line # instead of 0
lines group
Seizure priority by 194 1 - Standalone automatic 1 - Standal-
type of external 2 - Digital one
line 3 - Analog
external analog line 017 external analog line 1 - Loop seizure # instead of 2 - Canada
seizure protocol 2 - Ground seizure external line 1 - Other
countries
Caller ID for analog 005 external analog line 0 - Disabled # instead of 1 - Brazil,
lines (CLIP) 1 - DTMF1 external line China, Peru,
2 - DTMF2 (off hook) India, IM-
3 - FSK Spain and IM-
English
2 - Russia
3 - Other
countries
external Line Call 155 External line 1 - Bidirectional # instead of 1 - Bidirec-
Direction 2 - Incoming unidirectional external line tional
3 - Outgoing unidirectional
Flash Duration in 118 external analog line 05 to 99 # instead of Country*
analog line 05 - 50 ms external line
99 - 990 ms
Reseizure time for 129 05 to 99 Automatic 05
external line 05 - 500ms
99 - 9900ms
Maximum time 117 05 to 20 seconds Automatic 13 seconds
between rings for for Argentina
an incoming call 4 seconds for
Korea
06 seconds
for the other
countries
Coefficient for an 147 external analog line 1 - Standard line, 900 # instead of 1 - Standard
external Analog 2 - 600 line external line line
Line 3 - Short line
4 - Long line
Type of Answering 158 external analog line 0 - None # instead of 0 - None
Signal** 1 - Polarity Reversal external line
2 - DTMF Tone
Tone detector 160 external analog line - Yes # instead of - Yes
# - No external line
external line 133 group of external lines 1 - Direct # instead of 1 - Direct
connection. 2 - Satellite PABX external line


Second external 134 0 to 9 or 5-second 0
access code 00 to 99 or timeout
none (no code)
Automatic Seizure 036 extension - Yes Automatic # - No
of an external Line # - No
False tone 063 - Yes Automatic # - No: Argen-
# - No tina and India
- Yes: all
other coun-
tries
Internal access 226 (00000 to 99999) Automatic Depending
code for Automatic on the coun-
seizure field try
External analog 079 External line - Yes # instead of - Yes
present # - No external line
Waiting time for a 083 External line (01 to 20) in 5-second Automatic 06 (30 s)
Second Attendant cycles
to answer a call on
an external analog
line
Overflow for a 099 0 or 890 a 899 (Group of external 0 or 890 to 899 (only for # instead of 1 - First
Group of external Lines) case # 1) group group
Lines + 2 - All
1 - For a specific group of external 3 - None
lines
2 - For all groups of external lines
3 - None
* 35/10 for Argentina 30/08 for Thailand, Malaysia and Singapore 18/10 for Portugal
9/9 for Spain, Australia, United Kingdom, Lithuania, Latvia and Italy 30/9 for India
27/9 for Greece, 8/8 for Russia, 10/10 for South Africa, 35/35 for Canada and Korea
27/60 for Turkey, 27/27 for France
24/10 for the other countries.
** Ask local carrier about availability.
Table 6-6 External line settings

6.2.3 Programming an Extension

Pickup groups 143 Pickup groups 01 to 16 extension or # instead of None
- to delete a group extension
Call Groups (CG) 113 Call Group (CG) extension (up to 10) # instead of Extensions
- to delete extension 11/101 to 20/
110
Call Forwarding 222 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
within a Call Group # - to disable
(CG)
Alert Ring Timeout 035 Time: 00 to 59 seconds or Automatic - to disable
for Pickup Groups - to disable
Callback/Urgent 037 - enables Callback and Automatic # - to disable
Call activation by disables Urgent Call
timeout # - disables Callback and
enables Urgent Call
Caller ID by name 039 1 - Name and number Automatic 1 - Name and
or number 2 - Name number
3 - Number
UCD Subscriber 023 UCD Subscriber Group Extension (up to 32 agents) # instead of None
Groups - to delete group
Collect call barring 007 UCD Subscriber Group - to enable # instead of # - (To
for a UCD # - to disable group disable)
Subscriber group
Message Waiting 024 UCD Subscriber Group extension or # instead of - MOH
for UCD queue - MOH (Music on Hold) group
UCD Queue size 025 UCD Subscriber Group 00 to 99 slots # instead of 99 slots
group
Time for Message 026 UCD Subscriber Group (00 to 99) in 5-second # instead of 0
Waiting connection cycles group
to UCD Queue
UCD overflow call 027 UCD Subscriber Group Extension or UCD Group # instead of None
destination or group
- to delete
Round-robin distri- 028 UCD Subscriber Group - to enable # instead of - to enable
bution to agents # - to disable group
Time for Agents 029 UCD Subscriber Group (00 to 99) in 5-second # instead of 00 (0
Notes cycles group seconds)
Ring Signal Time at 030 UCD Subscriber Group (01 to 99) in 5-second # instead of 06 (30
an Agent cycles group seconds)
Agent Status After 176 UCD Subscriber Group - Available # instead of # - Unavail-
Signaling Timeout. # - Unavailable group able


Cascade Call 181 0 - Last automatic 0 - Last
Forwarding part- 1 - First
ner
Time in UCD 031 UCD Subscriber Group (00 to 99) in 5-second # instead of 12 (1 minute)
Queue cycles group
On Hold Message 032 UCD Subscriber Group - to enable # instead of # - to disable
before Signaling # - to disable group
UCD Call
Minimum time for 033 UCD Subscriber group (00 to 99) in 5-second # instead of 00 (0
UCD Queue On cycles group seconds)
Hold message
Hunt Groups (HG) 021 Hunt Group (HG) extension or # instead of None
- to delete group
Call forwarding 223 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
within a Hunt # - to disable
Group (HG)
Hunt Group selec- 022 Hunt Group (HG) 1 - Linear # instead of 1- Linear
tion (HG) 2 - Round-robin group
Timeout within a 242 Hunt Group (HG) (01 to 24) in 5-second Automatic 04
Hunt Group (HG) cycles
Override 144 extension 0 - Without permission # instead of 0
1 - With permission and extension
beep
Silent Monitoring 046 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
Call Identification 010 Analog extension 0 - No Caller ID # instead of 0 - Other
for analog exten- 1 - DTMF before ringing extension countries
sion (CLIP) 2 - DTMF during ringing 3 - Korea
3 - FSK before ringing 5 - France FT
4 - FSK during ringing
5 = FSK prior to ringing or
during a conversation
6 = FSK during ringing or a
conversation
Hide group prefix 188 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
Electronic Lock 126 extension 00000 to 99999 Automatic 00000
Password or
* - reset
Timeout Call 130 (01 to 99) in 5-second Automatic 06 (30
Forwarding - No cycles seconds)
Answer
Dialing Mode 168 Extension Detection: # instead of 0 - Automatic
0 - Automatic extension
1 - Pulse (DP)
2 - Tone (DTMF)


Flash Detection 131 Extension 001 to 250 (in 10 ms # instead of 035 - Portu-
Time cycles) extension gal, Argen-
tina and
Thailand
036 - Korea;
028 - Other
countries
Overflow exten- 132 1 - No answer Extension Automatic Extension 11/
sion* 2 - Busy 101
3 - Wrong number
Hotline 145 Extension (except 11/101) Phonebook entry # instead of - Without
000 to 249 or extension Hotline
- without Hotline
Warmline 162 Extension (except 11/101) 0 to 9 seconds # instead of 0 seconds
extension
Assigned Group 151 Executive extension (up to 8) Extensions assigned (up to # instead of None
15) extension
or
- to delete
CD Interface 146 Interface: extension # instead of HiPath1120/
assignment HiPath 1120: 01 to 04 extension 1150:
(for system tele- HiPath 1150: 01 to 08 1st - 11,
phones) HiPath 1190: 01 to 24 2nd - 12, etc.
or HiPath 1190:
- to delete None
Extension coeffi- 148 Analog extension Line type (Brazil): # instead of 1 - Default
cient 1 - 900 ohms extension extension
2 - 600 ohms
3 - 900 ohms
4 - 600 ohms
Activating external 014 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
Message Waiting # - to disable
Indicator
External MWI 015 extensionor # instead of None
group - to delete extension
Message Waiting 065 MSN number (up to 20 # instead of None
server number digits) number
Collect call barring 193 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable

by extension # - to disable extension
Type of equipment 003 extension 0 - Normal (telephone) # instead of 0 - Normal

connected to the 1 - Data (Fax/modem) extension
extension 2 - Answering machine
3 - Music module
4 - External entrance tele-
phone
5 - Voice Mail


Auto-Answering 034 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
Mode # - to disable extension
Pulses for call 041 Analog extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
charges on an # - to disable extension
analog extension
Timer for outgoing 047 extension Call duration: 00000 to # instead of 36
external calls 17280 in 5-second cycles extension
Activate/Deacti- 048 extension - to enable Automatic # - to disable
vate timer for # - to disable
outgoing external
calls
Activate/Deacti- 239 extension - to enable Automatic # - to disable
vate timeout for # - to disable
external calls
Timeout for exter- 240 extension Timeout for external calls # instead of 00000
nal calls 00000 to 64800 in 5- extension
second cycles
Day to begin time- 241 (01 a 31) or Automatic * - deacti-
out * To deactivate vated
Answering timeout 082 Index: 001 to 140 (01 to 20) in 5-second Automatic 06 (30
for a Second Atten- cycles seconds)
dant for calls
received over MSN
Modem extension 085 Extension Automatic None
MSN and exten- 086 extension Index: 001 to 140 Automatic None
sion assignment +
for external outgo- 1 - Day
ing calls 2 - Night
External-to-exter- 091 extension - To activate # instead of # - To deacti-
nal transfer # - To deactivate extension vate
Transfer when 217 - To activate Automatic - To acti-

extension is busy # - To deactivate vate
Elapsed timeout 218 - To activate Automatic # - To deacti-

for external-to- # - To deactivate vate
external connec-
tion
Configuring a time- 219 0000 to 1440 (in 1-minute Automatic 1 hour
out for an external- increments)
to-external connec-
tion
Disconnect time- 183 (004 to 120) in 5-second Automatic 60 (300
out after an exter- cycles seconds)
nal-to-external
transfer


Code for Discon- 184 Code: Automatic 00
nect Timeout 00 to 99
after external-to-
external
Transfer
Conditional 097 Numbers from 01 to 50 Automatic 5 numbers
forwarding limited
by extension
Permission for 098 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
conditional # - to disable extension
forwarding
Call Forwarding - 185 extension - to enable # instead of # - to disable
Busy after Call # - to disable extension
Forwarding No
Answer:
Permission for 247 extension - to enable # instead of - To acti-
conditional call # - to disable extension vate
forwarding
* The overflow extension can be accessed through the specified internal number and cannot be used or programmed as a
Fax extension.
Table 6-7 Programming an Extension
Country Permission List Denied List

Brazil 190 193 0900
0800 0810 900
Argentina
Portugal 112 64
Chile 800
Venezuela
Mexico
Vietnam
IM Spanish 190
IM English
IM French
China
Malaysia
Singapore 999 1800 #571#
995 1608


Thailand 01 11 001
2 12 100
3 13 101
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
Greece 100 199 090
166 0800
India
Pakistan
Spain 091 1003 903
112 900 905
906
Russia 01 03 05
02 04 07
09
00
Ukraine
Peru
Philippines
Canada
South Africa
Turkey 0900
Latvia 01 04 0900
02 112
03
Lithuania 01 03 0900
02 112
Italy 112 115 0900
113 118
Australia 000 0900
United Kingdom 000 0900
France 3010 3
3040 08
3611 00
0800 026
0810 0269
0820 0508
0825 0590
083605 0594
0596


Korea 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Table 6-8 Default settings for EWACO
6.2.4 DISA

DISA permission 018 extension - to enable # instead of # - To deacti-
# - to disable extension vate
MSN DISA 019 MSN number (up to 20 # instead of None

digits) the digit or
Automatic
DISA external line 020 external analog line 1 - Never # instead of 1 - Never
2 - Night only external line
3 - Day only
4 - Always
Table 6-9 DISA
6.2.5 General settings
Programmed Code Intermediate data Data to be programmed Completing Default

Functions data entry
Music on hold 136 0 - No music Automatic 1 - Intern
1 - Intern MIDI MIDI
2 - Intern- Wave
3 - External
4 - External extension
Assigning Exten- 087 1 or 2 - MOH Group extension or # instead of None
sions to MOH - to delete extension
Groups


Music source for 088 1 or 2 - MOH Group 0 - No music # instead of 0 - No
the MOH Group 1 - Internal MIDI group music
2 - Internal - Wave
3 - External
4 - External extension
Music Source 089 1 or 2 - MOH Group Extension or # instead of None
Extension - to delete group
External music 064 extension or Automatic None
source - Extension - to delete
assignment
Setting the time for 169 Connection time: Automatic 10
an external room 01 to 99 seconds seconds
monitor
Interdigit Pause 227 1 to 5 seconds Automatic 2
Time Setting seconds
Types of caller lists 049 1 - external Automatic 2 - Inter-
2 - Internal and external nal and
external
Deleting digits 171 Initial sequence of digits (up to 5-second None
from the caller list 6 digits) timeout
Date/Time - 114 DD - Day, from 1 to 31 Automatic
Manual setting MM - Month, from 1 to 12
YY - Year, from 00 to 99
HH - Hour, from 00 to 23
MlMl - Minutes, from 00 to 59
Automatic Update 038 - to enable Automatic - to
of Date/Time # - to disable enable
Callback for exter- 221 - to enable Automatic - to

nal calls via ISDN # - to disable enable
Call Charge Unit 195 Value: 000000000 to Automatic factor -

999999999 00001
+ slot - 0
Comma position: 0 to 3
Multiple for call 042 1 - Factor 1 Pulse multiplier: 000 to 254 Automatic 001 -
charge factor 2 - Factor 2 Value 1
Call charge factor 043 extension 1 - Default # instead of 1-
for extensions 2 - Factor 1 extension Default
3 - Factor 2
Call charge value 197 extension Value: 000000000 to Automatic factor -
by extension 999999999 00001
+ slot - 0
Comma position: 0 to 3


Call cost limit by 044 extension - to enable Automatic # - to
extension # - to disable disable
Date for updating 045 dd (day, from 01 to 31) or Automatic - to

the call cost limit - to disable disable
for an extension
Setting a system 180 New password (5 digits) Confirm new Pass-
password password word -
31994
Night service pass- 149 00000 to 99999 Automatic Pass-

word word -
31994
Restoring default 199 System password (default: 31994) Automatic
settings
Regular timers 139 **01 to 35: Timer code New setting: 0 to 65535 #
Factory
System timers 140 **1 to 34: Table entry New setting: 0 to 255 #
default
Emergency 040 Position: 1 to 5 Number (up to 10 digits) 5-second See

numbers timeout Table 6-
11 on
page 6-
221
Module detection 061 00 - Detect all modules or # instead of 00

01 to 20 slot position
Type of MSN 073 Position: 001 to 140 Type of signal: 1 to 4 Automatic 1
Signal
Reference clock 090 position or Physical Interface: 1 to 5 Automatic Auto-
00 + - Erases (switches to auto matic
mode) mode
Assigning a tempo- 093 Input data type: Automatic None
rary MSN 1 - MSN Number
2 - MSN Number slot
MSN identification 224 Identification mode Automatic None
mode 1 - None
2 - MSN Name
3 - MSN Number
Remote adminis- 220 a password of up to 5 digits, Automatic None
tration password from 00000 to 99999
through an MSN
Delete discon- 166 Automatic None
nected consoles


PABX Trace log 246 01 - Analog extensions 5-second None
02 - External analog lines timeout
03 - optiPoint extensions
04 - KS extensions
05 - ISDN telephones
06 - ISDN line
07 - Voice Mail
08 - CLIP/FDW
09 - External connections
10 - Sensor/Relay
11 - ISDN/CAS Layer 3
12 - ISDN Layers 1 and 2
13 - optiPoint Layers 1 and 2
- delete current configura-
tion
** For further details on how to set timers, refer to the Help file of the HiPath 1100 Manager administrative software. See the
sections on timers.
Table 6-10 General settings
Country Emergency Numbers Name

Brazil 190 Police Fire Department
193
Portugal 112 Emergency
Spain 112 Emergency
Latvia 01
02
03
04
112
Lithuania 01
02
03
112
Italy 112
113
115
118
Australia 000 Emergency
England 999 Emergency Services
112
France 15 SAMU
17 Police Fire Department
18 Emergency
112
115
Korea
Table 6-11 Lists of Emergency Numbers (040)

6.2.6 Updating the Software

SW Information 001 - Displays the software release, Press any key
version number, product name, to finalize
APS, and serial number. entry.
Local SW Update 060 Automatic
Activating a SW 055 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
Update # - to disable
Day for SW Update 054 dd (day, from 01 to 31) or Automatic 01
Time for SW 058 hh:mm (hh from 00 to 23 Automatic 00:00

Update and mm from 00 to 59)
External number 056 Number (up to 20 digits) # instead of None
for updating the the digit or
software Automatic
Frequency of SW 057 Month (01 to 12) Automatic 01
update
Uploading the SW 059 hh:mm (hh from 00 to 23 Automatic 00:00

update and mm from 00 to 59)
Table 6-12 Updating the Software
6.2.7 Remote Administration

Service Call *994 Number of Service Center # - to confirm Automatic
Remote Software *9415 Automatic

Update
Remote Operation 084 1 - Via ISDN Automatic 1 - Via ISDN
Mode 2 - Via modem
Activating remote 066 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
administration # - to disable
External number 067 Position: 1 to 4 Number (up to 20 digits) # instead of None
configuration slot position
Remote adminis- 068 Position: 1 to 4 00000 to 99999 # instead of None
tration password slot position
Remote MSN 069 Position: 001 to 140 or Automatic None
- to delete


Without MSN Veri- 070 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
fication # - to disable
Remote adminis- 157 - to enable Automatic - to enable
tration via DTMF # - to disable
Ending remote 196 Automatic
administration
Table 6-13 Remote administration
6.2.8 Internal entrance telephone

Configuring an 115 Position: 1 to 20 Extension or # instead of # - No
internal entrance - to delete slot position
telephone
Door lock 116 Position: 1 to 20 - to enable # instead of # - to disable
# - to disable slot position
DIDs for entrance 159 Position: 1 to 20 Extension 1 + Extension # instead of Extension

telephones + 2 (up to 10 Extensions) or extension 11/101
1 - Day service - to delete
2 - Night service
Permission for 125 Position: 1 to 20 Extension + or # instead of All exten-
opening door - to delete extension sions
Table 6-14 Internal entrance telephone
6.2.9 Call Detail Report Manager

Call detail report 006 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
with a serial inter- # - to disable
face
Ticket cost code 095 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
ticket # - to disable


Data transmission 120 1 - 9600b Automatic 3
rate 2 - 14400b
3 - 19200b
4 - 38400b
5 - 56000b
6 - 57600b
7 - 115200b
8 - 128000b
9 - 256000b
Digit suppression 121 0 to 9 (suppress digits) Automatic 0
in call detail reports
Call detail report for 161 1 - Incoming/Outgoing calls Automatic 1 - Incoming/
incoming calls* 2 - Outgoing calls Outgoing
3 - Incoming/Outgoing calls
+ CLIP
4 - Outgoing calls + CLIP
Call Detail Report 167 Sequence consisting of the 5 seconds time- None
Filter first 25 digits of the out
number to be billed
(up to 4 digits)
Cost Code type 243 1 - Optional Automatic 1 - Optional
2 - Mandatory
Cost code confir- 244 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
mation # - to disable
* If the system is enabled for Caller ID over digital or analog lines by the local carrier.
Table 6-15 Call detail recording
Code Group Country Display language

01 Brazil Brazil Portuguese
(default) Bolivia Spanish
Paraguay* Spanish
02 Argentina Argentina Spanish
03 Portugal Portugal Portuguese
04 Chile Chile Spanish
05 Venezuela Venezuela Spanish
06 Mexico Mexico Spanish
07 Vietnam Vietnam English
08 IM Spanish Columbia Spanish
Uruguay
Ecuador
Central America
Indonesia** English


09 IM English Saudi Arabia English
Bahrain
Egypt
United Arab Emirates
Ghana
Yemen
09 IM English Iran English
Jordan
Kuwait
Libya
Nigeria
Oman
Kenya
Zimbabwe
Syria
Sudan
Tanzania
Serbia/
Montenegro
10 IM French Algeria French
Cameroon
Ivory Coast
Lebanon
Morocco
Senegal
Tunisia
11 China China English
12 Malaysia Malaysia English
13 Singapore Singapore English
14 Thailand Thailand English
15 Greece Greece English
16 India India English
17 Pakistan Pakistan English
18 Spain Spain Spanish
19 Russia Russia English
Belarus
20 Ukraine Ukraine English
21 Peru Peru Spanish
22 China2 China2 English
23 Philippines Philippines English
24 Canada Canada English
25 South Africa South Africa English
26 Turkey Turkey English
27 Latvia Latvia English
28 Lithuania Lithuania English
29 Italy Italy English
30 Australia Australia English


31 United Kingdom United Kingdom English
33 France France French
34 Korea Korea English
* For Bolivia and Paraguay, set "01=Brazil" for country/country group then "02=Spanish" for language.
** For Indonesia set "08=Intern. Spanish" for country/group of countries. then "03=English" for language.
Table 6-16 Country/Group of Countries (165)
Country Protocol Code

Brazil (01) DTMF1 1
IM-Spain (08), IM-English (09), India and Peru (21) DTMF2 2
Other countries FSK 3
Table 6-17 Analog CLIP Protocol (005)
6.2.10 Fax/DID Feature

Call answering 009 Select forwarding digit: 0 to 9 or Type extension number, # instead of None
menu group, relay on/off, remote the forwarding
configuration to be associ- digit
ated to the number or wait
timeout to delete.


Message 137 9 - Record Type of message: #
recording 0 - Play Fax Mode:
+ 01 - Greeting for busi-
Type of message: 01 to 12 ness hours (24 s)
02 - Greeting for night
service (24 s)
03 - Transfer (16 s)
DID Mode:
04 - Greeting for busi-
ness
hours (32 s)
service (32 s)
06 - Transfer (16 s)
Fax/DID Mode:
07 - Greeting for busi-
ness hours (32 s)
service (32 s)
09 - Call forwarding (16 s)
10 - Identification
message (16 s)
11 - Alarm (8 s)
12 - Reservation
Configuring the call 127 External line 0 - Module disabled # instead of 0
answering mode 1 - Fax the number of
2 - DID the free line
3 - Fax/DID
4 - Message
5 - Autofax
Fax reception 128 External line Extension or # instead of None
extension - to delete external line
Collect call barring 008 1 - Fax - to enable # instead of # - to disable
2 - DID # - to disable mode
3 - Fax/DID
4 - Greeting (message)
MSN Answering 080 Position: 001 to 140 0 - Deactivated # instead of 00 - Deacti-
for Fax/DID 1 - FAX slot position vated
2 - DID
3 - Fax/DID
4 - Message
5 - Autofax
Fax Extension for 081 Position: 001 to 140 extension # instead of None
MSN slot position
Fax/DID release 094 (00 to 99) in 5-second Automatic 06 (30
after timeout cycles seconds)
Table 6-18 Fax/DID Feature

6.2.11 EVM module

Duration of greet- 200 (01 to 05 min) - Time for Automatic 2 minutes
ing messages leaving a message
Mailbox language 201 01 - German Automatic 03 - IM
02 - English French
03 - French 06 - Portugal
04 - Dutch and Brazil
05 - Italian 07 - Spain,
06 - Portuguese Argentina
07 - Spanish and IM Span-
08 - Czech ish
09 - Slovenian 12 - Greece
10 - Polish 02 - Other
11 - Romanian countries
12 - Greek
13 - Estonian
14 - Latvian
15 - Lithuanian
16 - Finnish
17 - Danish
18 - Swedish
19 - Norwegian
20 - English (US)
21 - Spanish (INT)
22 - French (Canada)
23 - Korean
24 - Flemish (Belgium)
25 - Portuguese (Brazil)
26 - Chinese
27 - Turkish
Maximum number 202 (01 to 24) - Number of mail- Automatic 12 boxes
of auto-config- boxes .
urable mailboxes
Mailboxes Assign- 203 number: 01 to 24 Extension or EVM virtual # instead of a None
ments port (744 to 747) mailbox
Mailbox Password 204 number: 01 to 24 Password, up to 4 digits # instead of a 1234
mailbox
Mailbox recording 205 * - to enable # instead of a # - to disable
activation # - to disable mailbox
Type of mailbox 206 number: 01 to 24 1 - Manual # instead of a 1 - Manual
greeting or mailbox
2 - Day/Night
Configuring a 207 number: 01 to 24 1 - Greeting 1 (Day service) # instead of a 1 - Greeting
greeting for a mail- or mailbox 1 (Day
box 2 - Greeting 2 (Night service)
service)


Message source 208 1 - Message 1 Port: 7491 or 7492 # instead of a None
or mailbox
2 - Message 2
Message Mode 209 1 - Message 1 1 - Continuous # instead of a 1 - Continu-
or or mailbox ous
2 - Message 2 2 - Single
Optional message 210 Position: 001 to 140 1 - Message 1 # instead of a None
for MSN or mailbox
2 - Message 2
System number 211 Number up to 10 digits 5-second None
timeout
Type of system 212 1 - Unknown Automatic 3 - Italy
number 2 - System Number 1 - Other
3 - Local Area Code (LAC) countries
4 - Country Code
Sensor message 213 1 - Message 1 Automatic None
(HiPath 1120) or
2 - Message 2
Type of voice mail 214 1 - None Automatic 1
2 - VMI
3 - EVM
Voice mail group 215 UCD Group or * to delete Automatic None
Mailbox assign- 216 Mailbox 1 or 2 Greeting message port: # instead of a None

ment for auto- 7491 or 7492 mailbox
answering mode
Audio quality 228 1 - Best - for greetings and Automatic 2 - High qual-
messages ity for greet-
2 - High quality for greetings/Best for
ings/Best for messages messages
3 - High quality for greet-
ings and messages
Message/Greeting 230 external analog line 1 - Message 1 # instead of None
for an external or trunk
analog line 2 - Message 2
Table 6-19 EVM module

6.2.12 Digital trunk settings

S0 Ports 062 Position/slot: 1 - External line and exten- # instead of 1 - external
HiPath 1120: 02 sion slot position line and
HiPath 1150: 03 2 - External line extension
HiPath 1190: 01 and 11 3 - Extension
Operation Mode 190 01, 02, 03 or 11 1 - Point-to-point connec- # instead of 1 - First port
for S0 Line* + tion (PP) slot position 3 - All other
00 to 01 (HiPath 1120 - 00 PP or 2 - Point-to-Multipoint ports
PMP only) connection (PMP)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150) 3 - S0 Bus line
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
Symmetric/Asym- 074 01, 02, 03 or 11 - Asymmetric Automatic # - Symmet-
metric Call + # - Symmetric ric
00 to 01 (HiPath 1120 - 00 PP or
PMP only)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
No ACK Setup for 075 01, 02, 03 or 11 - to enable Automatic Depending
S0 Line + # - to disable on the coun-
00 to 01 (HiPath 1120 - 00 PP or try
PMP only)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
Notify 076 01, 02, 03 or 11 - to enable Automatic Depending
+ # - to disable on the coun-
PMP only)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
Automatic Keypad 077 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
# - to disable
Assignment of a 078 Position: 001 to 140 external line or # instead of All assigned
digital line to an - to delete slot position lines
MSN
External line prefix 189 1 - National Line prefix (up to 5 digits) # instead of None
2 - International the digit or
automatic
External number 191 Position: 001 to 140 DID final digits (up to 20 # instead of None
registration digits) slot position
Assignment of an 192 Position: 001 to 140 Extension, Call Group (CG, # instead of None
MSN to attendants + HG or UCD with up to 10 extension
1 - Day service extensions per group) or
2 - Night service EVM Virtual Port (744 to
3 - Day service, second attendant 747).
4 - Night service, second attendant - to delete


Busy signal** 004 Position: 001 to 140 Busy signaling group: 001 # instead of None
+ to 140 the code
1 - Day
2 - Night
Local area code 011 Enter the local area code # instead of None
filter (up to 10 digits) the code
Country code filter 012 See Enter the country code (up # instead of 55 - Brazil
Table 6-21 on page 6-232 to 10 digits) the code
Call deflection 229 - to enable Automatic # - to disable
# - to disable
ISDN Layer 1 101 01, 02, 03 or 11 - to enable Automatic Depending
00 to 01 (HiPath 1120 - 00 PP only try
or PMP or PMP)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
ISDN Layer 2 102 01, 02, 03 or 11 - to enable Automatic Depending
00 to 01 (HiPath 1120 - 00 PP only try
or PMP or PMP)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
B channel 103 01, 02, 03 or 11 - Master Automatic Depending
+ # - Slave on the coun-
PMP only)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
"No DIV.LEG info" 249 01, 02, 03 or 11 - to enable Automatic Depending
for ISDN line + # - to disable on the coun-
PMP only)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1150)
00 to 04 (HiPath 1190)
* For E1 digital lines select PP connection.
** This feature is valid only for digital lines with an attendant number. It is not valid if more than one extension is configured
for the slot/DID number/MSN. If the Fax/DID module is installed and configured for digital lines, this feature will also be
invalid.
For further details on how to install S0 MOs see System expansion limitations on page 2-30.
Table 6-20 Digital trunk settings0
Country CAC Country CAC

South Africa 27 Latvia 371
Argentina 54 Lithuania 370
Australia 61 Malaysia 60

Country CAC Country CAC

Brazil 55 Mexico 52
Canada 1 Pakistan 92
Chile 56 Peru 51
China 86 Portugal 351
China 2 86 United King- 44
dom
Spain 34 Russia 7
Philippines 63 Singapore 65
Greece 30 Thailand 66
IM Spanish - Turkey 90
IM French - Ukraine 380
IM English - Venezuela 58
India 91 Vietnam 84
Italy 39 France 33
Korea 82
Table 6-21 CAC Code (012)

Default configura- 013 Automatic ADSL
tion of the LAN module:
interface IP 10.0.0.1
SLIMC,
SADSLIM,
LIMC or
ADSLIM
modules
IP of the
modem:
192.168.254.
254
IP of the
module:
192.168.254.
253
Table 6-22 LAN interface modules

6.2.14 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120

Sensor function 170 0 = Deactivate the Automatic 0
configuration sensors function (default)
1 = Dial the number speci-
fied in "Number dialed by
sensor activation" (Code
052).
2 = Activate the relay
through the sensor
3 = Detect DTMF code.
When this setting is
selected, the number that
was called must acknowl-
edge or ignore an alarm
call by sending an
acknowledgement code
(# DTMF signal)
Sensor Activation 174 0 - Contacts closed # instead of 0 - Contacts
Logic 1 - Contacts open the sensor closed
Time between 050 Time: 00 to 10 minutes Automatic 03 (3
attempts for acti- minutes)
vating the sensor
MSN assignment 051 Position: 001 to 140 or Automatic None
for the sensor - to delete
Number dialed by 052 Number (up to 20 digits) Automatic or None
sensor activation #
Number of 053 001 to 100 (attempts) Automatic 001 (1
attempts for acti- attempt)
vating the sensor
DTMF signals for 177 Number (up to 20 digits) Automatic or # None
the sensor # - To confirm
Relay* 175 1 - Switch Automatic 1 - Switch
2 - Monoflop
3 - Invert
4 - Music on Hold
5 - External signal
Timer for deactivat- 173 000 to 255 # instead of 002 - (1
ing the relay (intervals of 0.5 s) number second)
External ring for 071 extension Automatic None
activating the relay
* When playing music from an external music source, all regulations relating to copyrights for the country in question have
to be followed.
Table 6-23 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120

Comments about the systems programming codes
6.2.15 Run quick test
Checking terminals
Check the display of each terminal (for time and date). If there is nothing on the display, it
means that there is a problem with the terminals or cables. Replace the terminal or inspect
cables.
Check analog terminals.
Checking to see if the systems starts up properly

Make random internal and external calls.
6.3 Comments about the systems programming codes
6.3.1 Main Configurations
Dialing mode on an external analog line (119)

The system supports two dialing modes for external and absent lines (for unused external line slots):
DP - Dial Pulse
MF - Multifrequency (tone)
Default access to a group of external lines (002)

This feature configures dialing "0" for each extension as the dialing method for a group of external lines. The default external
line access code is "0."
If the user enters an external access code of "0," the system will search for a Free
line in the group assigned. If there is no free line, the group will search for a line in
another group.
Analog line attendants (142)

These define the extensions or Consecutive Groups that will first answer calls received from a specific external line during a
specified time period (Day/Night). Any extension can also be configured as a second attendant. In this case an extension only
receives a call when the external line answering extension does not answer the call within a specified time (code 083). When
this occurs, extensions configured as second attendants for external lines receive the call along with the first attendants.

If an extension is connected to a door opener device, the device cannot be config-

ured as an attendant.
Within a subscriber group, an incoming call rings at the first extension available, ac-
cording to the call distribution plan configured for the UCD subscriber group.
When there is no first attendant configured, the call is forwarded to the overflow ex-
tension. If no overflow extension is configured, the call ends. In such cases no ex-
tension is signaled, the call cannot be captured, and the
system will continue to wait until the carrier clears this external line and makes it
available.
Special class of service for blocked extensions (096)

This allows you to switch a blocked extension (with an electronic lock) to any class of service.
Speed Dial/Phonebook (112)

You can store up to 250 telephone numbers of up to 20 digits each in the System Speed Dial. You can assign a name of up to
15 characters to each number. This allows you to make alphanumeric searches (see Phonebook searches in the User Manual).
To insert an interdigit pause, enter the "P" character using the HiPath 1100 Manager or press the Redial key using a system
telephone (see Interdigit Pause Time Setting (227) on page 6-255).
Numbers stored in the Speed dial phonebook can be retrieved by entering their assigned speed-dial number. This can be done
from any extension. By default there are no speed-dial numbers stored in the phonebook.
.
For the HiPath 1120, phonebook entry 249 is reserved for relay and sensor functions.
To dial an external number, enter the external line number instead of the external ac-
cess code "0."
Denied numbers list (123)

There are 3 denied numbers lists valid for all extensions in the "Restricted Trunk Access (with Denied List)" category.
list 1 allows you to store 10 numbers

list 2 allows you to store 25 numbers;
list 3 allows you to store 35 numbers.
To change a blocked number, simply enter its list number and then the new number.
Permission list (124)

There are 3 Permission Lists that are available for dialing from any extensions in the category Outward-Restricted Trunk Ac-
cess:


list 3 allows you to store 25 numbers.
To change an allowed number, simply enter its list number and then the new num-
ber.
Permission for using Speed Dial numbers without COS analysis (072)
This code allows users of a class with no designated permission to make external calls using the Speed Dial Phonebook.
COS assignment (111)

There are up to 8 access categories for accessing external lines that can be assigned to extensions:
No Trunk Access (No Permission) - For making internal calls and answering external calls
Outward-Restricted Trunk Access - For receiving internal and external calls, and for
answering and receiving transferred calls. However, it does not have normal access to
make external calls, except for calls dialed directly from the Phonebook or from Permission
Lists.
Restricted Trunk Access - For receiving internal and external calls and for making external
calls to any number that is not included in the Denied List
Unrestricted Trunk Access - Can make any type of call.
An extension may be assigned two different categories, one for Day and one for
Night service.
COS Changeover (178)

This code allows extensions to use a feature for temporarily changing over the class of service. It is therefore possible to allow
or deny an extension to transfer its class of service temporarily to another telephone.
Language (164)
Defines the language for displaying messages on the system telephone display. This field is not automatically updated since
it is based on the country option selected. When the Language field is changed the Country is not automatically changed. It is
therefore possible to select a country with a different default language. Example: Country: Brazil, Language: English.
Country/Group of Countries (165)

Specifies the country where the system will be used, configuring regional settings accordingly.
After Country settings are configured, the system is restarted.

Attendant Console (150)

This streamlines the flow of calls to one console equipped with a system telephone with a display.
The Attendant Console cannot receive "Direct message to the speakerphone" and it
cannot belong to any "Assigned Group.".
Carrier dialing mode field: LCR or ACS (225)

This allows the user to change carrier selection and use the best possible option to originate external calls.
ACS does not affect emergency numbers (040) when the user dials directly.
Warning tone for calls without LCR (092)

When the system is configured to use LCR, the HiPath 1100 can alert the user when an external call is being placed to a des-
tination using a non-default carrier with higher rates for that time of day. This may be due to the unavailability of an external
line for LCR (Least Cost Routing).
When using a standard telephone, a warning tone indicates to the user that a different carrier is completing the call at this time.
When using a system telephone, the carriers name will show on the display.
This feature works only for ISDN lines and it must be provided under contract from
a carrier.
To activate the time for LCR fallback (250)

This timer should be enabled for routes subject to delays of problems making call connections (for example, SIP Boxes). When
the preset time has elapsed, the call is routed to the Default Carrier defined in that rule of the LCR (See Manager - A31003-
K1270-M100-*, LCR).
Time for LCR fallback (251)

This configures the routing time to the Default Carrier defined in that rule of the LCR (See Manager - A31003-K1270-M100-*,
LCR).
6.3.2 External line settings
Group of external Lines (156)

This allows you to configure the access to an external line or a group of external lines using either the access code 0 or
another.

Seizure priority by type of external line (194)

This setting specifies which type of external line will be seized when making an outgoing call.
External lines can be accessed using the access code 0 or the code specified for a group of lines.
If the PABX has digital and analog lines, you may specify which type of line will have priority.
External analog line seizure protocol (017)

This feature specifies the protocol to be used by the system for seizing an external analog line, based on the local carriers
information.
This features is only available for Canada.
Caller ID for analog lines - CLIP (005)

Enabled by the local carrier, this service provides Caller ID over FSK and DTMF protocols on analog lines.
In the HiPath 1190 there is an upper limit of 16 lines configured with the CLIP DTMF option that causes limitations in the con-
ference feature depending on the number of lines being used by the CLIP DTMF at any given time. This is caused by the fact
that both the CLIP DTMF and the Conference use common resources in the system.
So, for example:
In a system with 16 CLIP DTMF lines there can be 2 conferences with 3 participants;
In a system with 8 CLIP DTMF lines there can be 1 conference with 8 participants or 2
conferences with 4 participants;
In a system with no CLIP DTMF lines there can be 2 conferences with 8 participants.
To free additional ports for use with the Conference feature without depending on the use of the CLIP DTMF, this function
should be disabled for certain lines.
When a country setting is specified, the appropriate protocol is automatically select-

ed.
External line call direction (155)

Specifies how to access external lines when receiving or making a call.
An external line can be:
1 = bidirectional
2 = Incoming unidirectional
3 = Outgoing unidirectional
Flash duration on an analog line (118)

Specifies the time during which the Flash signal remains active on the external analog line in relationship to the detection de-
faults set at the exchange.

Reseizure timeout for an external line (129)

This setting specifies the timeout to reseize the external line after a call has been completed.
Maximum time between rings for an incoming call (117)

This setting defines a time interval of approximately 6 seconds between two pulses transmitted by the local carrier. At the end
of this time interval, the system disconnects from the external line and gets ready to receive other calls.
Coefficient for an external analog line (147)

This function couples the impedances for a system and the public network external analog line to which it is connected.
Type of Answering Signal (158)

If your carrier provides this feature, call detail recording occurs in real time, i.e. when the called party answers the phone, the
public exchange sends a signal for the system to start call detail recording.
The following types of signal are possible:
None
Polarity reversal
DTMF Tone.
When DTMF is selected, you must program a tone (A, B, C or D) using Manager. If
a tone is not programmed using the Manager, the switch defaults to tone A.
Tone detector (160)

When it is enabled it runs two functions in an external analog line:
1. This setting has the system wait for a dial tone detection on the public exchange before
making it available to send to the selected number. If there is no dial tone (for example, no
line in installed) the system blocks the line automatically.
With standard MF telephones, the number dialed will be transmitted to the external line
approximately 4 to 5 seconds after the last digit is dialed (1A dialing).
2. It detects the closure of an incoming call using the busy tone (busy tone detection) in the
following cases:
External Call forwarding;
External transfer;
Incoming for DID/FAX;
Incoming for Answering machine;
Incoming for EVM module;

Incoming for VMI.
Connection type (133)

This setting determines whether the group of external lines that is connected to one of the HiPath 1100 systems is also inter-
connected to another C.O. or PABX.
Second external access code (134)

This setting determines the code to be sent by the Satellite PABX in accordance with the access code for external lines on the
Master PABX. This code is used for determining the availability of a dial tone on an external line.
Auto-seizure mode for an external line (036)

This feature dials an external call when the handset is lifted, without using an access code (e.g. 0). When this setting is selected
you must enter a code to dial internal calls or activate the Extension key.
Activating this feature may impact the programming of the Dialing Mode (Code 68),
assuming option 0 (Automatic ID) is selected. It is recommended that you reconfig-
ure the Dialing Mode (Pulse or Tone) for the extensions.
False tone (063)

This sends an external line dial tone even when there is no external line available (valid for MF/DP extensions only).
If LCR (configured via the Emergency numbers) or Emergency Numbers is en-

abled, the user will hear a False Tone regardless of what has been programmed.
Internal access code for Automatic seizure field (226)

This features specifies the code to be used for making internal calls when an extension is configured for Automatic Seizure of
an external line.
Access codes are configured according to the country. If no access code is specified, the feature will not work.
Country Code
Spain 99
Latvia
Lithuania
Australia
Greece
Italy 69
Portugal 6
Other None
External line present (079)

This setting allows you to determine whether a given external line exists.

In the case of an external ISDN line, if the setting is configured as Absent two inter-
faces will be disabled. For digital lines (E1 CAS) you must also program a TME1
module1 using the E1 Trunk Manager application.
Waiting time for a second attendant to answer a call on an external analog line (083)
This setting specifies a timeout before the call starts ringing at the extension.
Overflow to a group of external Lines (099)

This feature makes a second group of external lines available in the event the lines in the first group are busy. The availability
of the second group of external lines depends on the extensions class of service.
The external line reservation (*493) does not work for the Overflow group.
6.3.3 Programming an extension
Pickup Groups (143)

You can classify extensions in up to 16 Pickup Groups so that an extension from one group can answer calls that ring at other
extensions in the same group.
You can also add extensions to an existing Pickup Group.
Call Groups (CG) (113)

Extensions can be grouped in Call Groups that are accessed by dialing numbers from 770 to 779. When the number is dialed,
all telephones in the group ring until one of them is answered.
An extension can be configured for more than one Call Group (CG).
Call Forwarding within a Call Group (CG) (222)

This feature works only on digital lines. It provides call forwarding for extensions belonging to Call Groups. When a call is routed
to a Call Group, it rings at all extensions at the same time. The extension configured for call forwarding will ring at its destina-
tion. If the call is answered, the other extensions in the group stop ringing. Otherwise, the call rings again until one of them
answers it.

External call forwarding to a group member should not be used if "Call Deflection"
(Code 228) is activated for that member (it does not work for analog lines).
In this case, the system does not receive any information about the forwarded call
having been answered or not. Since the system does not have this information, it
continues to signal all other group members.
Alert ring timeout for Pickup Groups (035)

Incoming calls are signaled on standard telephone sets within a pickup group (Code 43) in telephones without a display they
are signaled by an alert ring signal. The duration of the ring tone can be specified.
Callback/Urgent Call activation by timeout (037)

When an extension or external number (on an ISDN digital line) is busy, this configuration allows you to set a timeout for acti-
vating the Recall or Urgent Call features after approximately 7 seconds.
Call name/number display (039)

This setting specifies the type of Caller ID information that will be shown on the telephone display.
UCD Subscriber Groups (023)

This setting creates a group of extensions that can receive internal and external calls.
A Subscriber Group is a group of extensions available for answering calls made to a specific number assigned to it.
An internal or external call directed to this group will be answered by the extension that has been free the longest.
In the event that all extensions in the group are busy external calls are routed to a hold queue.
Collect call barring for UCD Group (007)

When collect call barring is activated, all collect calls are automatically rejected by the system (for Brazil only). The system by-
passes collect call barring for members of a UCD Group, that is, call barring is only verified for the group.
If a call has been answered at least once by the system, collect call barring cancels
the blocking.
If the call is forwarded due to Call Forwarding - No Answer over a digital line (*14)
and collect call barring is activated, the call will ring at the first DID for the external
line.
Message Waiting for UCD Queue (024)

This feature lets you assign a message or Music on hold for a UCD group extension when all extensions in the group are busy
or unavailable.
UCD Queue Size (025)

This specifies the number of calls that can wait on a UCD Queue, for each UCD Group.

Timeout for Activating a Call Waiting Message for a UCD Queue (026)
This allows you to specify a timeout for routing calls to a waiting queue in the event that agents are busy or unavailable.
Different timeouts can be set for each UCD Group. The default setting is for a message to be played immediately, or as soon
as a call is placed in a queue.
UCD Overflow Call Destination (027)

This setting specifies the overflow for UCD calls when:
All agents are logged out
A UCD Queue reaches the maximum number of calls waiting
The queues overflow timeout expires.
Different overflow locations can be set for each UCD Group.
Round-robin distribution of calls to agents (028)

This setting allows you to configure a round-robin type distribution of calls so each call rings automatically at the station of the
next available agent. If no agents are logged in, calls are forwarded to an overflow call destination.
Time for agents notes (029)

This features allows you to set a period of time for the agent to leave the group without being disturbed and make notes about
a call.
Ring signal time at an agent (030)

This setting specifies how long an incoming call will keep on ringing at an agents station before it overflows.
Agent status after signaling timeout (176).

Allows you to identify agents status at the end of the signaling timeout.
By default, once the signaling timeout expires the call is transferred to a different group member and the agent becomes un-
available (see User Manual - Available/Unavailable Agent for a UCD Group).
Cascade Call Forwarding partner (181)

Cascade call forwarding allows you to choose how the call forwarding partner will be displayed on the telephone display. (See
Programming Manual - A31003-K1270-U100-*-*, chapter on Cascade Call Forwarding partner)
In the following situation: Number 1 is set to forward to Number 2 and Number 2 is set to forward to Number 3. Here, the
display can be configured as follows:
Last partner: this will be shown on the caller display: forwarded to: Number 3 and Number
3 will appear on the display: from: Number 1.
First partner: this will be shown on the caller display: forwarded to: Number 2 and Number
3 will appear on the display: from: Number 2.

If Number 3 is a VMI:
Last: the message is stored in Number 1s mailbox. If Number 1 does not have
a mailbox, the Voice Mail must request the port for recording the message
First: the message is stored in Number 2s Mailbox.
Time in a UCD Queue (031)

This setting specifies the maximum length of time a call is allowed to remain in a UCD Queue.
Once the time expires, the call is disconnected or forwarded to a UCD overflow call extension. The default setting for a call to
remain in a Queue is 1 minute.
Waiting Message before Signaling a UCD Call (032)

This feature allows you to connect a call waiting message for incoming calls before they ring at an extension.
Minimum Time for Call Waiting Message in a UCD Queue (033)

This setting specifies a minimum length of time until a message is played for calls waiting in a UCD Queue (032).
This feature works only when the Time in a UCD Queue option is enabled (Code
031).
Hunt Groups (HG) (021)

This setting allows you to group extensions into a maximum of 10 Hunt Groups (780 to 789).
A Hunt Group (HG) is a group of extensions assigned for answering calls made to a specific number.
When an extension does not answer an internal or external call within a specified period of time, the call rings consecutively
at the available and the busy extensions in the group. When no one is available, the extension may disconnect from the Hunt
Group.
This feature works only for digital lines.
Call Forwarding within a Hunt Group (HG) (223)

This feature works only for digital lines. It provides call forwarding for extensions belonging to Hunt Groups. When a call is
directed to a group, it ring at each extension, according to the group settings (linear or round-robin) When an extension is set
for Call Forwarding, calls are routed to the destination as configured. If a call is not answered, the other extensions in that group
do not ring. When no Call Forwarding is set, calls ring at the other extensions, as configured for the Hunt Group.

External Call Forwarding cannot be used for an extension that belongs to a group
when "Call Deflection" (Code 228) is activated (it does not work for analog lines).
In this case, the system does not receive any information about whether or not the
forwarded call has been answered. Since the system does not have this information,
it continues to signal all other group members.
Search Mode for Hunt Groups (022)

This setting specifies the type of search to be performed for an available extension within a group, whether linear or round-
robin.
When a call is received by a Hunt Group configured for linear distribution, the search starts from the first extension within the
group. In a Round-robin distribution the search starts from the extension following the last extension selected.
Timeout within a Hunt Group (HG) (242)

This sets the length of time in which an external or internal call must be answered by a member
of the group, and may be set for each group. If this times out before the group member answers,
the call will ring consecutively to the other free extensions of the group.
The Hunt Group will not be forwarded or overflow if the call is not answered.
Override (144)
This setting allows a specific extension to Override two other extensions with a conversation in progress.
Within the system, Override has the same limitation as the Silent Monitoring and Conference features. A maximum of 2 si-
multaneous Silent Monitoring is allowed by the system. Note: The Override feature is ticketed as a Conference.
Silent Monitoring (046)

This setting specifies the extension for performing Overrides without a beep.
Within the system, Silent Monitoring has the same limitation as the Conference and Override features. A maximum of 2 si-
multaneous conferences is allowed by the system. Note: The Override feature is ticketed as a Conference.
If the monitoring or the monitored party change status, Silent Monitoring will be canceled. This occurs, for example, when a
call is placed on hold.
On Profiset 3030 telephones, the MUTE option is automatically activated with Silent
Monitoring.

Feature limited to specific countries.

Within the system, Silent Monitoring has the same limitation as the Conference and
Override features.
A maximum of 2 simultaneous conferences is allowed by the system. Note: The
Override feature is ticketed as a Conference. If the monitoring or the monitored party
change status, silent monitoring will be canceled. This occurs, for example, when a
call is placed on hold.
Call Identification for analog extension (CLIP) (010)

When this feature is enabled and the extension receives an incoming call, the DTMF generator
will send a signal and display the callers information at the extension. When a E805C (Brazil)
or a Gigaset 4010 telephone is used, the Caller ID information is shown on the display.
If the country set (code 165) is France, the CLIP FSK feature will only be available for
the HiPath 1120 .
Hide Group Prefix (188)

This settings allows an extension to receive an external call over an external line belonging to a group of external lines, and to
hide the group number so it does not show on the display. When a special access external call is transferred to an extension
with this feature enabled, the external line number does not show on the display.
For example, an analog extension receives an external call over an external line that belongs to Group 890 - number 24987049.
When this feature is enabled, the display show only 24987049. When this feature is disabled, the display shows 89024987049,
that is, the number for the group of external lines followed by the external number.
To enable this feature, analog extensions must be configured for CLIP.
Electronic Lock Password (126)

It blocks the extension from making external calls allowing only internal calls or dialing a number directly from the Phonebook.
A 5 digit password is used to configure this setting. Should the user forget the password used to block the extension, the
password can be reset to the systems default (default password is 0000).
Timeout Call Forwarding - No Answer (130)

This setting specifies the time duration for external calls to ring at an extension before being transferred to a second attendant,
if there is no answer (*14).
Dialing Mode (168)

This setting specifies the dialing mode to be used by each extension or whether the dialing mode should be detected auto-
matically. Dialing modes are pulse (DP) and tone (MF).

Flash Detection Time (131)

The Flash signal generated by a Standard MF telephone will only be detected if it is within the range configured for the system.
It is therefore recommended that you check the Flash detection time of MF telephones and adjust the settings to approximate
them as much as possible.
The configurations for detection of Flash may vary from country to country.
The system has the capability for Automatic Flash Detection.
Overflow/Escape Extension (132)

An overflow extension only receives calls when the extension that was called is not available, does not answer or was not
programmed.
The overflow extension can be accessed through the specified internal number and
cannot be used or programmed as a Fax extension.
Hotline (145)
This function lets you dial a number previously programmed into the Phonebook automatically as soon as the handset is lifted.
Multiple extensions can dial a number programmed in the Phonebook.
Warmline (162)
It allows you to specify a period of time for activating the Hotline.
Each extension can have a different timeout set for the Warmline, from 0 to 9 seconds.
Assigned Group (151)

This feature allows you to assign many extensions to one executive telephone.
There are 8 groups available with 16 extensions each (all extensions must use system telephones).
CD Interface Assignment (146)

It allows you to connect a system telephone to any extension slot.
The default setting for this assignment is:
HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150

A1/B1 C1/D1 A1/B1 C1/D1
A2/B2 C2/D2 A2/B2 C2/D2

HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150

A3/B3 C3/D3 A3/B3 C3/D3
A4/B4 C4/D4 A4/B4 C4/D4
A5/B5 C5/D5
A6/B6 C6/D6
A7/B7 C7/D7
A8/B8 C8/D8
Table 6-24 CD Interface Assignment
Extension Coefficient (148)

This function couples the impedances of the system and the extension line to which it is connected.
Collect Call Barring by extension (193)

When this blocking is activated, the system automatically rejects all incoming collect calls over a digital line calls received over
an analog line are rejected only at the moment they are answered.
If a call has been answered at least once by the system, Collect Call Barring cancels
the blocking.
If the call is forwarded due to Call Forwarding - No Answer over a digital line (*14)
and collect call barring is activated, the call will ring at the first DID for the external
line.
Please ask your local carrier about enabling blocking on digital lines.
Type of Equipment Connected to an Extension (003)

This setting specifies the type of equipment that is connected to extension slot A/B or S0.
Normal (system telephone, ISDN or analog telephone)

Data (Fax/modem)
Answering machine
Music
External entrance telephone
Voice Mail

The Data (Fax/Modem) option uses the same dial tones and call sequence as the public network to avoid problems in detect-
ing pauses, internal dial tones and/or duplicate calls. In addition, the override and call waiting functions are blocked in order to
prevent transmission faults.
When connecting a fax device, no additional settings (such as Fax Detection)

> need to be configured.
The Answering machine option requires the same configuration as in "Data (Fax/Modem)". However, you can answer calls if
Auto-Answering is activated.
The External entrance telephone option supports up to 4 devices connected directly to analog ports A/B or in the bar of the
S0 module, as follows:
The external analog entrance telephone device must behave like an analog telephone
(dialing, detection and DTMF control)
The ISDN external entrance telephone device must behave like an ISDN telephone. It
must also be controlled by DTMF signals.
Consult the external entrance telephone manual to check available settings.

> Go to the HiPath 1100 Manager folder - Advanced/System Settings/General -
"External entrance telephone" and insert the information on the entrance tele-
phone device for correct working.
Auto-Answering Mode (034)

This setting specifies the use of the Auto-Answering Mode for the telephone by using a feature code (see Functions used for
Making Calls - Speakerphone Auto-Answering Mode in the User Manual).
Pulses for call charges on an analog extension (041)

This sends pulses to be charged for calls on an analog extension (12kHz/16kHz). With this feature, an extensions telephone
set can display the number of pulses or the amount charged for the call.
Please refer to the documentation provided with the telephone set connected to the
extension to find out if a billing indication is supported and which transmission mode
is used.

Timer for outgoing external calls (047)

This setting specifies a maximum time for the duration of an outgoing external call for each extension.
The time count starts upon connection of a call and will never restart while the call is in progress (e.g., when there is a transfer).
Once the time expires, the call is terminated.
Activate/Deactivate timer for outgoing external calls (048)

Activate/Deactivate the timer for a specified extension.
Activate/Deactivate timeout for external calls (239)

Activate/Deactivate the timeout for external calls.
Timeout for external calls (240)

This defines a time limit for making external calls on each extension. In other words, when the total time of the external calls
made reaches the time limit set for calls underway, these calls will be interrupted and no further calls may be made until more
time "credit" is awarded.
Calls may also be interrupted if the extension has been configured with these fea-
tures:
"Timer for outgoing external call" (Code 047) - the limit also stops counting.
"Billing" - the call will only be started or can continue if the time and credit limit
have not been reached.
For simultaneous calls, call times will be counted separately.
If the call ends before a cycle is complete, the time will be counted as if the call had
completed a 5-second cycle.
"Call Deflection" is not supported by this feature.
Timeout limit day (241)

This allows the user to define a day of the month on which the timeout for external calls on all extensions will begin.
Timeout for a Second Attendant for MSN (082)

This consists of a time period (in seconds) during which an incoming call rings at the First Attendant of an external line. If the
call is not answered within the specified amount of time, it will be directed to the Second Attendant.
Modem Extension (085)

This setting specifies the extension where the modem will be connected for serial remote access.
MSN Extension Assignment for Outgoing External Calls (086)

This allows a group extension to make outgoing calls using one of the selected MSNs.

Transfer when Extension is Busy (217)

This setting allows transferring a call when an extension is busy. A warning tone can be heard in the background on the exten-
sion that receives the transfer, meaning that there is a call waiting.
When an extension does not answer a call after a specified period of time or because it is configured with Do Not Disturb or
Data Protection, the call rings at the extension that originated the transfer. The period of time a call signals a busy extension
can be configured using the Timeout Call Forwarding - No Answer (130) on page 6-246 feature or the HiPath 1100 Manager.
Elapsed timeout for external-to-external connection (218)

This allows you to configure a timeout between two external calls when no other extension is involved in the call.
The user hears a warning tone before the timeout expires. The warning tone is sent 10 seconds before the end of the timeout.
When the call is between two external lines with no internal extension involved, the call is terminated once the timeout elaps-
es.
Configuring a timeout for an external-to-external connection (219)

This makes it possible to configure a timeout between two external calls when no other extension is involved in the call. Call
timeout can be set from 1 minute to 24 hours (default setting is 1 hour).
Disconnect timeout after and external-to-external transfer (183)

With this option you can specify a period of time for disconnecting an external call. This option applies when at least one ex-
ternal line is an analog line and the call is transferred (Code 091) or forwarded (*11) to an external destination by an authorized
extension.
Code for a disconnect timeout after and external-to-external transfer (184)

This option allows you to set a code to restart the timeout period for disconnecting an external call. This applies when at least
one external line is an analog line, and after a call has been transferred (Code 091) or forwarded (*11) to an external destination
by an authorized extension.
Once the call is transferred and answered at the destination, a disconnect timer is activated (default is 5 minutes). A 20-second
warning tone is sent to both parties before the call is disconnected. In order to continue the call without disconnecting, the
destination number must enter this code (MF, default "00") to restart the timeout.,
External-to-external transfer (091)

This feature allows a specified extension to transfer an external call (incoming or outgoing) to another external call.
An external-to-external transfer can only be made when at least one of the lines is
digital.

An external-to-external transfer over an analog line is terminated in the following

three situations:
Elapsed timeout for external-to-external connection
(code 218)
When a busy signal is detected
Type of answering signal (Code 158).
Conditional forwarding limited by extension (097)

Incoming calls can be forwarded to a specified destination list, as configured in a TAPI-type application such as a Windows
TAPI Browser. The settings of the previous list or Unconditional Call Forwarding will be replaced with the new list settings.
The following information is required for configuring a list:
Incoming caller ID
Day of the week and time
Type of call (internal or external).
When more than one number has been specified for incoming calls to an extension, the call forwarding priority will be:
1. Checks to see if the Caller ID for the incoming call matches the number programmed for the extension
2. Checks to ensure that the Type of Call (internal or external) has been configured
3. Checks the time settings.
This configuration is available through a CTI interface.

The system allows up to 50 call forwarding numbers.
Conditional Call Forwarding has priority over an unconditional Call Forwarding.
Conditional Call Forwarding is not available for S0 extensions.
Functions: The extension has permission for Conditional Call Forwarding and the system is connected to a PC
running a TAPI application.
1. Conditional Call Forwarding rules and conditions for a specified extension can
be defined by using a Windows TAPI application
2. Apply the settings to the extension desired.
3. From this moment on the extension will be forwarded.
Permission for Conditional Call Forwarding (098)

This allows a conditional forwarding to occur.

Call Forwarding - Busy after Call Forwarding No Answer (185)

When this feature is activated, an extension configured for Call Forwarding - No Answer (see Call Forwarding - No Answer, in
the User Manual) routes incoming calls to the same destination configured for Call Forwarding - Busy.
.
Urgent Call and Callback when Busy facilities do not work when Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No
Answer are activated.
If the extension called is configured to use Do Not Disturb and Call Forwarding - Busy then the call will be for-
warded. If Do Not Disturb is enabled at the destination to which the call is forwarded, the caller will hear a busy
signal.
Permission for conditional call forwarding (247)

This allows an extension to forward a call to an external line.
6.3.3.1 External Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)

With this feature a group of extensions called an external MWI Group is able to receive signals generated by the Voice Mail
Server that indicate when there is a message waiting in the users mailbox.
For standard telephones with a display, MWI will only be indicated if a CLIP is con-
figured for the extension using option 3 or 4 ( Call Identification for analog extension
(CLIP) on page 6-213).
Activating external Message Waiting Indicator (014)

Activates the MWI feature for a group of extensions.
External MWI Group (015)

Extensions configured in this group are allowed to receive a Message Waiting Indicator from an external Voice Mail Server
where users messages and greetings are stored.
Message Waiting server number (065)

This setting specifies an MSN number for the Waiting Message server.
6.3.4 DISA
This setting allows you to make an external call from an external telephone (as if it was an extension) through your system. In
addition, the following features can be activated or deactivated: Call Forwarding, Feature Deactivation, Conference, Night ser-
vice, Suffix-Dialing, Door Opener, Electronic Lock, Individual Speed Dial, System Speed Dial, Relay, and Do Not Disturb.
Only one external call can be made or one feature can be used at a time. After suc-
cessful activation of a feature, the call is immediately terminated. In the case of a
call, it is terminated right after a caller hangs up.
TAPI only monitors physical ports. To operate correctly, a DISA feature must use special ports, and those cannot
be monitored. If a physical port is used when the DISA feature is active, the TAPI will be able to monitor it.

DISA Permission (018)

This setting specifies an extension for using the DISA feature.
MSN DISA (019)

This specifies from which MSN the DISA features will run.
The MSN number must be registered in the External Number Registration (Code
191).
External Line DISA (020)

This setting specifies an external line and the timeout for DISA answering.
The system allows only one DISA call. When there is a DISA call in progress, a second call to a DISA external line or one with
a DISA answering mode is treated as a regular call. If a call is received over an external line configured as a Fax/DID and DISA,
the call is answered by the Fax/DID if available.
When a digital line is used for the DISA feature, its MSN number ("MSN DISA" - Code
019) is always active for answering DISA.
When DISA is activated for incoming external calls on an external analog line, all calls
are answered by DISA.
6.3.5 General settings
Music on Hold (136)

This setting specifies the type of music the caller on hold will hear.
Code 136 is used when there is no MOH group assigned to the extension.
Assigning Extensions to an MOH Group (087)

This setting allows you to distribute extensions in two MOH groups.
Music source for the MOH Group (088)

This setting specifies the type of music the caller on hold will hear.

Music Source Extension (089)

This setting specifies the extension to which a music source is connected.
The extension specified here is deactivated when the External music source - Ex-
tension assignment (064) option is configured.
External music source - Extension assignment (064)

With this feature, Music On Hold can be played from a terminal connected to an extension slot.
Setting the time for an external room monitor (169)

It allows you to activate room monitoring for a specified period of time, using the telephones microphone.
If a Fax/DID module is installed in the system, room monitoring can be implemented using an external telephone (Babyphone).
Interdigit Pause Time Setting (227)

It lets you configure a pause ("P") between MF digits. This can be used when programming System and Individual Speed Di-
aling, system telephone programmable keys or for activating Suffix Dialing. This period of time can be set from 1 to 5 seconds.
The default setting is 2 seconds.
To insert an interdigit pause, enter the "P" character using the HiPath 1100 Manager or press the Redial key using
a system telephone. Each "P" character inserts a 2-second pause (default) in the connection. A longer pause can
be inserted by entering more than one character (for example, for a 4-second pause enter "PP")
The first "P#" or "#" specifies that the next digits for A will only be forwarded if:
- Digital line or S0 extension:
P# - DTMF digits are sent after local carrier identification, when B is not answered.
# - DTMF digits are sent after B is answered.
- External analog line or analog extension:
P# or # - DTMF digits are sent after B is answered.
Other characters ("#" and/or "*") may be added after "P#".
Caller List Type (049)

This setting specifies whether only external calls or all internal and external calls should be displayed in the Caller Lists.
Deleting digits from the Caller List (171)

Specifies the digits that do not need to be repeated when making a call.
Date/Time - Manual Setting (114)

Sets the current Date and Time for the system. When the default configuration is restored (99), the Date setting displays in-
formation about the date the software was create and will display the time as 12:00.

Automatic date/time update (038)

This setting allows automatic synchronization of the systems date and time through the local carrier, during an external call.
The settings that are automatically updated are: month, day, time and minute. Year
is not included in the FSK message settings - it is defined as the softwares manu-
facturing date and can be manually adjusted.
Callback for external calls via ISDN (221)

By configuring this setting, an external ISDN call can schedule a Callback for the MSN number called.
A callback can only be scheduled for an MSN.

MSN numbers must be programmed and must have attendants.
Call Charge Unit (195)

To show call charges in currency units you must specify a call charge factor. Pulses are multiplied by this factor.
A Call Charge unit consists of a pulse transmitted to the public exchange, over the line, that displays call charge information
according to the type of line (external or ISDN), call type (local, DDD, International, etc.) and other parameters specified by the
carrier.
Multiple for call charge factor (042)

This setting specifies the multiplier for Call Charge factors. The default setting specifies that each pulse be multiplied by 1 for
both factors.
Call Cost Limit by Extension (043)

This setting specifies whether the extension should be assigned a rate schedule and, if so, which Factor should be used to
calculate call charges.
Call charge value by extension (197)

This setting specifies the amount that can be spent by each extension.
Call cost limit by extension (044)

This setting limits the amount available to an extension for Call Charges.
On HiPath 1100 systems, the Billing facility (Call cost limit by extension) is only avail-
able for digital trunks (ISDN and CAS). Please consult your local carrier to know if this
service is provided.

Date for updating the call cost limit for an extension (045)
This specifies a day for resetting the Call Charge limit.
Setting a system password (180)

Access to the systems programming mode is protected by password to prevent unauthorized access. The default password
is "31994." This password can be changed.
Make a note of the new password and store it in a safe place. If you forget the pass-
word, the only way to access programming mode is by asking a support technician
to give you access.
Night service password (149)

Independently of the system password, an additional password can be defined for activating/deactivating different features
(e.g., Night service, relays). The default password is "31994." This password can be changed.
Restoring default settings (199)

Restores all default factory settings. After entering this code, the system will restart. Only the settings for Country/Group of
Countries (Code 65) will be saved as last configured.
Regular timers and System timers (139 and 140)

These settings allow you to reset the times for some features and signals according to the specific characteristics of a user or
a country.
DTMF signals for the sensor (177)

When an alarm is activated, the HiPath 1120 dials the number on entry 249 of the Phonebook. The numbers are dialed and the
sequence of digits, in DTMF format, is repeated every 5 seconds after the connection is established. The purpose of this se-
quence of digits is to identify the alarm source. An alarm center, for example, is able to identify which PABX is sending the
tone. If the receiving exchange does not acknowledge the alarm within 1.5 minutes, the procedure is repeated every 3 minutes.
Emergency numbers (040)

You can specify up to five emergency numbers. When one of these numbers is dialed and all external lines are busy, the call
on the first external line will be interrupted and the line used for making the emergency call. Only an incoming call over an
analog external line will not be disconnected.
.
The name assigned to these numbers can have up to 15 characters.

Emergency Numbers are not affected by the ACS feature.
Emergency calls never use external lines configured for:
Internet access
Absent external line
An external line configured to accept only incoming calls

Module Detection (061)

This setting specifies the slots to which new modules are connected, so that the system may detect them.
The modules can only be connected/disconnected when the system is turned off.
If the Detect all slots option is selected, the system will detect the components in the following order :
1 - External lines/digital extensions
2 - External lines/analog extensions
This means that if a numbering sequence for analog lines/extensions has been previously configured it will be changed when
an S0 module or a TME1 module is added.
Example: In a HiPath 1150 system that has only a MB module (2 external lines and 10 analog
extensions) the numbering pattern will be 801 and 802 for the external analog lines, and 11 to
20 for the analog extensions. Inserting an S0 module produces the following configuration:
- 801 to 805 for the digital lines
- 806 and 807 for the external analog lines
- 11 to 15 for the ISDN extensions
- 16 to 25 for analog extensions
- Extension 16 is now the Programming extension.
If Detect only specified slot is selected, the existing numbering configuration will remain. Only the module will be detected
by the system.
The modules can only be connected/disconnected when the system is turned off.
Type of MSN Signal (073)

This setting lets you choose one of the four types of rings for various calls, and a ring for registered MSNs. The default config-
uration for MSNs is Type 1 ring.
Reference Clock (090)

This allows you to specify a module slot for the systems Reference Clock.
Assigning a Temporary MSN (093)

This feature allows you to use a temporary MSN from your own directory to make an external call. Or, to use the "Key Assign-
ment" feature to assign a key to an MSN for monitoring incoming and outgoing calls (see Key Assignment - Using a Temporary
MSN for Making a Call, in the User Manual).
MSN Identification Mode (224)

This setting specifies how the MSN is shown on a system telephone display. In the default configuration no Mode is config-
ured.

This feature does not work when option 1 "Caller ID/Number" is selected in Code 039.
Remote Administration password through an MSN (220)

This setting allows you to specify a password so that all incoming calls from a remote HiPath 1100 Manager that provides the
correct password can be authorized to execute Remote Administration. In the default configuration, no password is set.
To activate this feature, the feature "Without MSN Verification" (code 070) should be enabled.
Delete disconnected consoles (166)

This programming code should be used in case the warning message "NBR. MAX. MAX. KEY DIAL EXCED" is shown on the
display when connecting a console (optiPoint key module or optiPoint BLF) to an optiPoint 500 telephone set or activating a
virtual keypad on the system telephone (KS).
If this code is used, all the programmed keys of the disconnected consoles will be lost.
PABX Trace log (246)

This tool is used to monitor events that have occurred in the PABX over a certain time period. This code makes it possible to
configure the profiles to be monitored via the trace.
The trace can be started/ended using the HiPath 1100 Manager or the feature codes (see User Manual).
The default setting is trace not configured.
6.3.6 Updating the Software
SW Information (001)
This displays information about the systems software. To view this information use a system telephone with a display.
The switch must be connected to a PC and the CommServer and the APS Version Verifier must be running.
Local SW Update (060)

This feature initiates the download of the last software version released for the PC and then downloads the update for the
exchange. For this feature to work the system must be connected to a PC with CommServer and APS Version Verifier running.

Activating a SW Update (055)

This feature allows you to update the systems software automatically on a scheduled date.
Day for Update (054)

This setting specifies a day for starting the data transfer (upload process).
Time for Software Update (058)

This setting specifies the time of day for starting the data transfer on the specified day.
External number for updating the software (056)

This setting specifies a number to be used by the system to update the software.
Frequency of SW update (057)

This setting specifies regular intervals in months for transferring data.
During transfer the telephone operates as usual.
The default setting specifies updates to be done in a monthly basis.
Uploading the SW Update (059)

This setting specifies when the data downloaded will be uploaded to the systems memory.
During the upload (approximately 3 minutes) the telephone operates as usual.
The default setting specifies the time for the update process at 00:00 hours.
6.3.7 Remote configuration
Service Call (*994)

This feature allows you to call a service center and let administration be carried out remotely through the on-going call.
Remote Software Update (*9415)

If authorized, a software update can be started automatically.
Remote operation mode (084)

This specifies the remote updating of the software.
An update can be carried out remotely over external digital ISDN lines and analog lines via modem.
Remote administration activation (066)

This setting allows the system to be administered remotely.

External number configuration (067)

This specifies external numbers (Service MSN without external access code 0) that are able to perform remote administration.
The default configuration does not specify an MSN.
Remote Administration Password (068)

This specifies a password (5 digits) for enabling Remote Administration from an external number (Service MSN).
The default configuration does not specify a password.
Remote MSN (069)

This setting specifies an ISDN line MSN as the Remote MSN.
The system will only allow Remote Administration when this remote MSN is used.
The default configuration does not specify an MSN.
Without MSN Verification (070)

Remote Administration will be performed without verifying the Service MSN that has been transmitted.
Remote Administration via DTMF (157)

With this feature you can configure the HiPath 1100 remotely using an MF telephone.
Remote configuration:
Remote Configuration must be enabled and the programming extension must have a
conversation in progress on the external line over which programming is to be performed.
In Talk mode, enter the code (*991) in the programming extension to transfer control of the
HiPath 1100 to the remote programmer. The remote programmer must then enter the
system password using an MF telephone.
To execute the required programming, proceed as if the remote telephone were connected
directly to the system.
If a Fax/DID module is available:
Enter the code (* 95) using the remote MF telephone after answering the call. The remote
programmer must then enter the system password using an MF telephone.
To execute the required programming, proceed as if the remote telephone were connected
directly to the system.
If the system is connected through a serial cable to a PC with access to the tele-
phone system, the programming can also be done using a modem in conjunction
with the HiPath 1100 Manager. Refer to the instructions provided in the Help file.
Ending Remote Administration (196)

Ends remote configuration using a standard MF telephone.

6.3.8 Internal entrance telephone
Configuring an internal entrance telephone (115)

This function enables the system to use an entrance telephone. You can connect up to 20 entrance telephones in extension
slots. Each entrance telephone must be individually activated in the system.
1. By default no slot is set as an entrance telephone.

2. Only one entrance telephone may be connected to each module of the TFE
interface.
3. Each TFE module works as an entrance telephone OR pager interface. To use
both functions, two modules are required.
Door Lock (116)

This feature detects when there is a locking device installed in a given slot in the internal entrance telephone.
DIDs for entrance telephones (159)

It specifies the extensions that will be called during day or night service when the entrance telephone is activated.
The default setting is extension 11/101.
Permissions for the door opener (125)

If there is a locking device installed in given slots in the internal entrance telephone, permission will be required for opening
the door in the required slots.
This class of service is assigned to all extensions by default.
6.3.9 Call Detail Report Manager

Information about calls received and made are stored in the systems memory. CDR records can be reviewed in the following
manner:
By using a PC or printer connected through a serial interface.

By using a PC connected on a local network.
The tickets list can be viewed on a Billing Application installed in the PC or through Windows Hyper Terminal.
For the Windows Hyper Terminal, HiPath 1100 makes available a local control of ticket
purchasing at any time through a series of commands that can be programmed into the
application interface with the central.

Interface commands:
Command Description
\nticket_start\n This command will be sent by the user (Application) to the PABX, requesting
that the stored tickets start being sent.
\nticket_stop\n This command will be sent by the user (Application) to the PABX, requesting
that the stored tickets stop being sent.
After receiving and accepting those commands, new tickets or tickets that are still
stored will not be transmitted to the PABX.
Interface answers:
Command Description
\nend of tick- This answer will be sent by the PABX to the Application interface when no
ets\n stored tickets are left to be transmitted. This command can be used as an in-
dicator to end command "\nticket_start\n" when all stored tickets have been
sent.
\nprint_stopped\ This answer will be sent by the PABX to the Application interface after receiv-
n ing command "\nticket_stop\n" to inform the user that the connection with
the application can be closed without losing the tickets.
To set up and use the Billing Application, please refer to the appropriate product
manual.
For Windows Hyper Terminal, the following setting is required:

Configure the CommSever for ADSL connection.
Select the "Serial Printing" checkbox on the HiPath 1100 Manager, under Advanced -
> System Settings
On the HyperTerminal, select TCP/IP Mode and enter the configuration number for an
ADSL module (the default is 10.0.0.1) and the port (9366) or SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC
or ADSLIM modules (the default is 192.168.254.253) and the port (9366).

Do not use a Serial or ADSL connection type while using HyperTerminal. During
ticketing the administration can be performed via USB connection, optiPoint, ISDN or
analog modem.
Tickets will only be shown after the end of the first connection.
To establish a serial or ADSL connection to the HiPath 1100 Manager, disconnect
HyperTerminal.
It is recommended that you uncheck the "Serial Printing" checkbox on the HiPath
1100 Manager if tickets are not being issued over an ADSL connection.
To provide accurate call details, you must update the systems time and date infor-
mation.
The following information is recorded:
Current date (Date)

End of call (Time)
External line used (Ln)
Note: Example of the (Ln) field content for ticketing:
External line (Ln) Field

801 00
802 01
Extension (Ext)
Some specific types of access will be displayed in this field, indicated by the following numbers:
Access (Ext) Field

Sensor - Outgoing call 9101
Data Link - Outgoing or incoming data call for system administration 9201
DISA - Incoming call 9301
Fax/DID - Incoming call 9401
COS Changeover (WCOS)

Ring duration (Ring)
Call duration (Duration)

Dialed number (Number)

The system allows you to configure a feature that ensuring confidentiality of the number
dialed at the time the CDR record is issued. This replaces the numbers by the symbol ?
Type of call (I):
1 = Incoming call
2 = Outgoing call
5 = Transferred incoming call
6 = Transferred outgoing call
7 = 3-way conference with incoming
8 = 3-way conference with outgoing call
* = Incoming call not answered yet = incoming call
Impulses (Call fees) with a TME1 module installed.
Cost Code (Account code).
Example
Date Time Ln Ext WCOS Ring Duration Number I Call fees Acc. code
22.11.99 14:00:00 01 21 00:14 00:01:34 2222222 1
Table 6-25 CDR Header Layout
When a call is transferred, a new CDR record is created. The hold time at the external line is accounted for by the extension
that transferred the call.
In the event of a power outage during ticketing, all tickets that were being sent when
the power outage occurred are re-sent when a connection is re-established.
Example:
1. If 300 tickets are stored in the memory, the user establishes a new connection,
sends 100 tickets and terminates the connection.
2. Then the user establishes new connection to send the remaining 200 tickets, but
a power outage occurs.
3. After the power outage, once the user resumes his/her work, a new connection
is established. During this connection all 200 tickets that were being sent when
the power outage occurred are re-sent.
Call Detail Report with a Serial Interface (006)

This setting specifies that the Call Detail Report will be done through a serial interface.

CommServer does not work when this setting is enabled.
Ticket Cost Code Ticket (095)

External calls can be assigned Cost Codes which provide more control over telephony costs. This information may be present-
ed on the billing ticket. This Cost Code is defined by the user and is made up of a sequence of up to 10 random digits (0...9)
which could be, for example, the number of a legal process (see Functions Used During a Call - Cost Code, in the User Manual).
If Cost Codes have not been configured in advance using the HiPath 1100 Manager (See Cost Codes - A31003-K1270-M100-
*), only ten-digit cost codes will be accepted in analog and S0 telephones. Otherwise, the call will not be completed.
Baud Rate (120)

The system can be connected to a PC or printer with a V.24 adapter to display or print the call detail report. The communication
speed can be set to ensure proper data transfer.
Digit Suppression in CDR Record (121)

This setting specifies how many end digits can be omitted in the data output when dialing a call on an external line. These
digits will be replaced by "?."
Call detail report for incoming calls (161)

When this option is selected, call details are shown in the CDR record.
For the system to receive Caller ID information over digital, E1 CAS/S2 or analog
lines the Caller ID feature must be enabled by a local carrier.
The Caller ID service must be contracted with a local carrier.
Call Detail Report Filter (167)

The number programmed in this filter specifies the type of outgoing call to be recorded, based on the first four digits of the
dialed number.
For example, in order to record only outgoing international calls you must program the digits "00." The maximum number of
digits is 4.
In the default setting a digit sequence is not configured.
Cost Code type (243)

Inputting the Cost Code when making an external call can be "mandatory" or "optional", depending on the way the code is con-
figured.
Optional - There is no need to type in the Cost Code at the start of the call in order to
complete the call. However, it can be typed in during the call if you are using a system
telephone.

Mandatory - The Cost Code must be typed in at the start of the call or it cannot be
completed.
Cost Code confirmation (244)

When Cost Code confirmation is enabled, only Cost Codes that have been configured previously may be used (Cost Codes
must be set using HiPath 1100 Manager). If an invalid Cost Code is typed in, a negative tone will sound or a message will be
displayed.
If confirmation is disabled, any Cost Code may be used.
6.3.10 Fax/DID Feature

This provides automatic answering of an external call in addition to message playback and fax signal detection.The caller can
dial any extension or enter any digit configured in the answering menu and be transferred to another extension or group.
The feature has five modes of operation: Fax only, DID, Fax/DID, message and Auto Fax. If an S0 or TME1 module is also in-
stalled, a fourth mode of operation is available: a DID for digital lines.
Messages stored in this module can be programmed as a Second Attendant for external calls or as a Forwarding Destination
for an Extension (see Call Forwarding in the User Manual). The maximum number of simultaneous conferences supported by
the system is 8.
Call answering menu (009)

The Fax/DID lets you create a customized call answering menu transferring the call to an extension or a group, depending on
the number entered.
A call is transferred to a preconfigured destination after 3 seconds. If a digit is entered before this time has elapsed, it will be
analyzed and the call will be forwarded to a new destination. The destination can be an extension or a group.
When the Call answering menu is not configured, the system can only detect extension and group numbers.
Message recording (137)

Allows you to record and playback greetings and messages, transfers and alarms. Simply speak to record or listen to the play-
back of a message right after the end of the sequence.
To stop the recording or playback of a greeting or message, press 1.
Call answering mode configuration (127)

The Fax/DID has five modes of operation available for the different messaging requirements.
Fax reception extension (128)

Specifies to which extension a call will be transferred when a fax signal is detected on an external line.
In "Type of Equipment Connected to an Extension - Position 003" you must specify

the extension as a fax extension before programming Code 28.

Collect call barring (008)

When this blocking is activated, the system automatically rejects all incoming collect calls to a Fax/DID over a digital line. Calls
received over an analog line are rejected only at the moment they are answered. Call Barring will not work for calls transferred
to a Fax/DID.
If a call has been answered at least once by the system, Collect call barring cancels
the blocking.
When an incoming call over a digital line is forwarded for not being answered (*14)
and Collect Call Barring is activated, the call will ring at the first DID for the external
line.
MSN Answering for Fax/DID (080)

This setting specifies a Fax/DID answering mode for each MSN number.
Call Deflection (page128) (Code 228) will not work in this case.
Fax Extension for MSN (081)

When a fax signal is detected, the Fax/DID can transfer a call to a pre-configured MSN number. The DID Mode does not need
to be configured for this feature.
Fax/DID Release after a Timeout (094)

When a Fax/DID is answering eight simultaneous calls, the next call will hear a ring signal generated by the local carrier, which
means that the HiPath 1100 has not answered the call yet. If the timeout specified for this feature is shorter than the local
carriers timeout, the call can be routed in two different ways, depending whether the PABX received it over an analog or a
digital line:
For an external analog line, the switch is required to bypass the Fax/DID module and
forward calls to an analog line attendant (if there is no attendant available, the call is
forwarded to an overflow extension). Of course, if a channel becomes available in the
meantime, the call will be answered as usual and the timeout will be ignored.
However, if the time specified for this setting is longer than the local carriers timeout (1.5
minutes for Brazil), the call will be disconnected by the local carrier before the PABX can
forward it to an attendant.
For digital lines (CAS or ISDN), the PABX sends a "disconnect" signal to the line upon
receiving the call. This means that the time specified for this setting is ignored in the case
of digital lines. When a Fax/DID module is busy answering 8 simultaneous calls, the
external user hears a busy signal.

When the Fax/DID module is busy answering calls, it means that it is playing one of
the 12 programmed messages or waiting for the user to press a key (in the case of
a DID). If the Fax/DID module has answered a call and forwarded it to an extension
(the call is ringing somewhere), that call will no longer considered one of the eight
calls that is being answered by the Fax/DID module keeping it busy. In sum, once
the Fax/DID module has forwarded a call to an extension, the channel is available for
another call.
6.3.11 EVM module

EVM (Entry Voice Mail) is a Voice Mail solution for HiPath 1100 systems. Its features are controlled through the keys on a sys-
tem telephone or any type of equipment with MF dialing capability. EVM is configured and activated by technical personnel
through the 1100 Manager administration software or a programming extension. When the system uses EVM, the UCD group
is reserved for interface use.
When a call to an extension is forwarded to an EVM mailbox (Call forwarding - No answer or Busy) a message
is played, explaining why the call is being forwarded.
These messages are played before the greeting message and cannot be overwritten.
Messages:
Call Forwarding - Busy after Call Forwarding - No Answer: "The line you are
calling is busy".
Call Forwarding - No Answer: "The user you are calling is not answering."
Duration of greeting messages (200)

This setting determines a time period within which the caller can record a greeting message.
Mailbox language (201)

This setting lets you select the language to be used for the mailboxes.
Maximum number of auto-configurable mailboxes (202)

This setting determines the number of mailboxes that can be configured by the user. No other settings need to be configured
for the auto-configurable mailboxes. If the number of mailboxes allowed is exceeded, it will not be possible to configure set-
tings correctly when using the EVM.
If mailboxes have already been configured using the HiPath 1100 Manager, fewer mailboxes will be available for auto-configu-
ration. For example, if there are 12 mailboxes and 10 have been configured through the HiPath 1100 Manager, only 2 boxes will
be available for configuration by the user.
Mailboxes assignments (203)

When attendants are used for MSNs, this feature assigns mailboxes to users extension slots or virtual EVM ports.

Mailbox Password (204)

This setting allows you to create a password for a specific mailbox. The default password is "1234".
Mailbox recording activation (205)

This setting allows you to record a greeting or a message to be played by the EVM.
Type of greeting for a mailbox (206)

This setting defines the type of greeting to be used for a specific mailbox when "Mailbox greeting configuration" is configured
as "Manual" (Option 1, Code 207).
Mailbox greeting configuration (207)

This option determines the type of greeting to be used for a specific mailbox.
For the "Manual" option, the Type of Greeting selected (1 or 2) must be the same as in the "Mailbox Greeting Configuration"
(Code 206).
The following settings are available for the "Day/Night" option:
Greeting 1 (Day)
Greeting 2 (Night).
Message Source (208)

This setting assigns a message to one of the two EVM ports. Alternatively, the message can be assigned to an MSN.
Message mode (209)

This setting specifies whether a message will be played only once or repeatedly.
Message for MSN (210)

This setting specifies whether a message will be played for a specific MSN.
System number (211)

This setting displays the number for the HiPath 1100 when the system is operating in a Point-to-Point (PP) environment.
System number type (212)

This setting specifies how an MSN configuration must be sent.
Type of voice mail (214)

This setting specifies the type of voice mail to be used by the system.
Voice mail group (215)

This setting specifies the UCD group to be used by the system.

If only one extension is selected as the first attendant, only one voice mail group
may be selected as a second MSN attendant, (See HiPath 1100 Manager).
Mailbox assignment for Auto-answering mode (216)

This setting assigns auto-answering to mailboxes.
Audio Quality (228)

This setting specifies the audio quality for playing back greetings and messages.
Message/Greeting for an external analog line (230)

This specifies whether a message/greeting should be played for an external analog line.
6.3.12 Digital trunk settings

The HiPath 1100 systems can be equipped with digital trunks by means of an S0 module (ISDN/ISDN access) and a TME1 (E1
CAS access).
TME1 module
E1 CAS access:
E1 CAS access allows the system to use Caller ID and direct dialing to extensions, reducing the number of lost calls and sim-
plifying access for the user. The HiPath 1150 can be equipped with one TME1 module (configured for up to 15 standard chan-
nels or 20 expanded channels) and the HiPath 1190 with two TME1 channels.
When only E1 digital lines are used, you only need to program the external number registration. Country Code and Area Code
can be left blank.
S2 access:
It provides connections to the ISDN network via primary access (30 Channels), allowing services offered by the network to be
used. The HiPath 1150 can be equipped with one TME1 module (configured for up to 30 channels) and the HiPath 1190 with
two TME1 modules (the first configured for up to 30 channels and the second up to 15 channels).
When the total number of digital trunks configured for the module plus the number of external analog lines exceed the maxi-
mum capacity of the system, the external analog lines for the EB 202, 206 or 210 expansion modules are disabled. Nonethe-
less, the extensions will continue to work as usual. Lines are disabled in the order that they are physically installed (1, 2, and
so on). This process continues until the total number equals the required number of trunks. The remaining modules continue
operating as usual.
However, in the case of the EB 200, 400 and 800 modules, it is strongly recommended that you change their slots to prevent
their being deactivated. The modules become inoperable if any one of their external line slots is disabled.
To determine how many analog and how many digital lines will be available on your system, see Table 2-3 on page 2-33:
S0 module:
Each ISDN access provides two communication channels (64 kbps each) as well a capability for sharing applications such as
video conferencing and Internet access. Depending on your carrier, some features may be provided, including Caller ID, Caller
ID Blocking, Direct Dialing to Extensions and so on. The HiPath 1120 can be equipped with a 2-port module, the HiPath 1150
with a 2-port module or a 5-port module and the HiPath 1190 with two 2- or 5-port modules.

When only ISDN digital lines are being used, the following functions must be configured: DID, External number registration,
Area code, Country code.
MSN Automatic Internal Distribution

This features allows you to assign different MSN numbers for each S0 interface. The number of S0 interfaces varies according
to the type of S0 module. MSN numbers must be configured using the Manager tool (see Help file on Manager application).
ISDN telephones can be configured for any of the MSN numbers assigned to an S0 interface. The configuration must be carried
out manually on each telephone set. The maximum number of MSNs allowed varies depending on the specific telephone mod-
el.
On the Gigaset SX255 you can assign many MSN numbers for each telephone using
the Manager tool. However, each set stores only the first 10 MSN numbers. For fur-
ther information on configuration and programming procedures for the Gigaset
SX255, refer to the Gigaset SX255 Users Manual (A31008-X255-B100-X-XX19).
Automatic MSN Assignment via Local Carrier

This is a subscription service enabled by a local carrier. When this facility is enabled external line MSNs can be automatically
registered.
On the Manager tool, when the Browse button is pressed (Basic -> MSN -> Settings -> Browse Button. For further information,
refer to the Help file), a message is sent to the local carrier requesting the MSNs. Once the carrier receives the message it
replies sending the MSNs which are then automatically entered into the system.
In order for all MSN numbers to be entered the remote seizure mode must be configured as PMP (Point-to-Multipoint) and the
system number must not have been specified in the Manager tool (Advanced->System Settings ->Regional Settings). If the
operating mode is PP (Point to Point), only the system number will be registered. You must configure MSN numbers (Basic-
>MSN->Settings). Any MSN number previously configured must be deleted.
Automatic MSN assignment facility provided by a local carrier only works if you also
subscribe to Call forwarding on the public network.
S0 Ports (HiPath 1190) (062)

This setting specifies the operating mode for the S0 module maximizing the systems port usage.
This option is best for the HiPath 1190 due to its high port capacity. The goal is to obtain a maximum number of extensions/
external lines allowed in relation to the following port detection rules:
External line and extension (default): Each port will decrease the number of external line slots by 2 and extension slots by 1.
The connection may be PP, PMP or S0 Bus line (see "Operation Mode")
External line only: Each port will decrease the number of external line slots by 2. The connection must be PP or PMP. If it has
been previously configured as an S0 Bus line, the connection will automatically revert to PP (which is the default).
Extension only: Each port will decrease the number of extension slots by 1. The connection must be a S0 Bus line. If it has
been previously configured as PP or PMP, the connection will automatically revert to S0 Bus line.
After completing the configuration, the system must be restarted.

S0 line operation mode (190)

This setting specifies the type of connection, either Point-to-Point, Point-to-Multipoint, or S0 Bus) between the S0 module and
the local carriers lines.
With the HiPath 1120, the S0 modules first port can only be a trunk, PP or PMP. It
cannot be programmed as an S0 bus.
With other switches, the first port may also be configured as an S0 Bus.
Symmetric/Asymmetric Call (074)

This setting configures the system for symmetric or asymmetric calls.
Check with your local carrier to find out which operating mode should be configured for your system.
No ACK Setup for S0 line (075)

Notify (076)
Automatic Keypad (077)

Your local carrier can inform you which ISDN features can be controlled by code in your country.
This feature allows you to activate the appropriate ISDN function at the terminal, without the need for external access.
Assignment of a digital line to an MSN (078)

This features allows you to assign the MSNs provided by your local carrier to calls made over digital lines.
External line prefix (189)

This setting specifies the prefix for the PABX external lines, for domestic and international calls. By default, the type of a pro-
grammed called is not specified.
External number registration (191)

To use the attendant feature, each external number must be registered to a specific slot.
If the prefix (Code 089) for these numbers has already been configured, only the final digits need to be registered.
By default, no digits are specified.
Assigning MSNs to attendants (192)

MSNs registered for each slot (see MSN Extension Assignment for Outgoing External Calls (086)) must be assigned to exten-
sions, call groups or a mailbox using a virtual EVM port (see Mailboxes assignments (203)) designated for answering calls dur-
ing a specified period of time.
An extension. Group or EVM virtual port cannot be assigned more than once. A distinctive tone on the handset indicates an
invalid entry.

Busy Signaling (004)

This signals the caller that the line is busy, when the system receives an incoming call and the attendant extension is busy.
This feature is valid only for digital lines with an attendant number. It is not valid if
more than one extension is configured for the slot/DID number/MSN. If the Fax/DID
module is installed and configured for digital lines, this feature will also be invalid.
Local area code filter (011)

This allows the system to send the Area Code (LAC) to a destination exchange over a digital line. This enables Caller ID.
Country Area Code Filter (012)

This allows the system to send the Country Code (CAC) to a destination exchange over a digital line. This enables Caller ID.
Call Deflection (229)

When this feature is available and provided by a local carrier, an incoming call to an extension enabled with Call Forwarding
(*11) is routed directly to an external destination over the public network. Alternatively, the HiPath 1100 system can be used.
ISDN Layer 1(101)

This allows you to change certain default ISDN settings for specified countries.
ISDN Layer 2(102)

Allows you to change certain default ISDN settings for specified countries.
B channel (103)
Allows you to change some default ISDN settings for specified countries.
"No DIV.LEG info" for ISDN line (249)

If this option is disabled and a local carrier provides the "Diversion" service for ISDN lines, the extension forwarding the external
calls to an external line can show the original numbers of the participants to the calling parties.
Otherwise, only the number of the MSN/Attendant of the PABX will be made available.
In the default configuration, this option is enabled for the following countries: Australia, Greece and the Netherlands.
This feature only works in ISDN lines in PP or PMP mode and only with T-Reference
Point.


These provide a LAN Ethernet interface via their RJ45 connectors that allow direct PC connections to HiPath 1100 within the
network and if you have an ADSL modem available, they can share ADSL access, dispensing with the need for an external
ADSL modem or HUB.
The HiPath 1100 can interact via the LAN network with the applications used in your administration, such as: HiPath 1100 Man-
ager, Interaction Center Smart, billing applications, and so on.
Default Configuration of the LAN interface (013)

This code restores the default configuration of the LAN interface modules.
ADSL module
Default IP of the module: 10.0.0.1
Default Subnet Mask of the module: 255.255.255.0
SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC or ADSLIM modules
Default IP of the modem: 192.168.254.254
Default gateway of the module: 192.168.254.254
6.3.14 Relay and sensor on the HiPath 1120

You can connect a Music module to the HiPath 1120 system. This module also provides a relay and a sensor for integrating
other devices such as an entrance telephone, a door opener, alarms, and so on.
Sensor:
When the state of a sensor changes (for example, when the sensor changes from an open contact to a closed contact), the
following functions can be executed:
Selection of a number in the Speed Dial Directory (Phonebook)

Activation of a relay
Dialing a number from the Speed Dial directory and activating a relay.
The activation logic based on the initial position of the sensor contacts as well as its resulting actions are programmable.
Relay:
If a sensor is programmed, the relay can be activated through that sensor. It can be activated either manually or automatically
after a specified time. When the relay is activated, the contacts close. When it is deactivated, the contacts open.
The name assigned to this position may have up to 15 characters.

Configuring the sensor function (170)

Allows you to select a function for the sensor:
Deactivating the sensor function (default)

Dial the number specified in "Number Dialed by Sensor Activation" (Code 052).
Activate the relay through the sensor
Detect DTMF code. When this setting is selected, the number that was called must
acknowledge or ignore an alarm call by sending an acknowledgement code (# DTMF
signal)
Sensor Activation Logic (174)

The basic position of the sensor can be set as follows: Contacts are closed and the sensor is activated when the contacts are
open or contacts are open and the sensor is activated when the contacts are closed.
Time between attempts for activating the sensor (050)

This setting specifies a timeout in minutes, after which a new attempt is made to call an internal or external number, if the
extension was busy.
MSN assignment for the sensor (051)

This setting specifies an MSN for the system, to be used for outgoing calls. With this MSN, the called party is able to identify
the origin of the call, for example an alarm call.
Number dialed by sensor activation (052)

This setting specifies the number to be automatically dialed when a specific sensor is activated. She number to be dialed when
the sensor is activated is stored in the System Speed Dial. When the number stored in the System Speed Dial is changed, this
field is updated, and vice-versa.
Number of attempts for activating the sensor (053)

This setting specifies the number of call attempts (between 1 and 100) for the number specified in Number dialed
by sensor activation. (See also Time between attempts for activating the sensor).
An attempt is made after every call that was not answered (busy signal), or when the "Detect DTMF Code" option (Code 70,
Option 3) is enabled and no acknowledgment is received. When this occurs, the call is disconnected and a new attempt is
made.
Relay (175)
This setting specifies the operating mode for the relay:
Switch" The relay can only be turned on from an extension by entering the proper feature
code (see "Miscellaneous Functions - Relay" in the User Manual).
"Monoflop": The relay is closed for a specified length of time. Alternatively, the relay can
also be opened before the set time by entering the proper feature code (see
"Miscellaneous Functions - Relay" in the User Manual).

"Invert": The current state of the relay is reversed when the feature code for activating the
Relay is selected at an extension.
"Music on Hold" The Relay can be used for activating external equipment connected for
playing messages/music.
"External signal" It is possible to use the Relay to control a second ring for an extension
slot.
Timer for deactivating the relay (173)

Specifies the length of time that the relay must remain closed.
If the closing time is set to "000," the relay will remain active until it is deactivated
manually.
External ring for activating the relay (071)

This setting allows you to use the relay to set a second signal (e.g. a ring) for a specified analog extension.
Sensor Message (213)

After assigning a number, you can assign a message to the sensor. This message will be transmitted to the assigned number
when the sensor state is changed.

Operation
7 Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for powering up and initializing the systems.
Warning
! Powering up and initializing the system is a task that must be performed only by au-
thorized technical personnel.
Step Action (Instructions)

1. Connecting the system to the power supply 7-278
(Connecting the Power Cable ->Initialization of the interface).
2. Activating System Programming 7-278
3. Programming with a Telephone Set 7-279
4. System programming mode using a PC 7-280
5. HiPath 1100 applications 7-333
Connecting the system to the power supply
Procedure
Step Procedure
1. Complete installation of all modules and system (Chapter 4, Installation).
2. Connect the interface.
3. Wait a few moments for the system to load the software.
Activating System Programming

The system HiPath 1100 comes with a factory default configuration, described in the
programming tables for each code.
If an update or modification is required, there are two possible programming options:
Programming Options Page

Using a system telephone or a Standard MF telephone 7-279
Using a computer 7-280

Operation
Programming with a Telephone Set
7.1 Programming with a Telephone Set

System programming can only be executed using the first slot on an analog extension of
the interface (default extension 11) equipped with an analogextension (MF) or on a KS-type
system telephone or in the first slot of an optiPoint 500-type system telephone. Programming
cannot be made on two extensions at the same time.
The reason for initially using a KS-type system telephone at extension slot 11/101 is that the
systems are shipped from the factory with the following default settings:
A1 and B1 slots are assigned to C1 and D1 slots on the motherboard (see Connections
to the systems MDF on page 4-170).
When using a system telephone with a display, you can follow the programming steps visually
on the display.
To access the programming mode on the specified extensions:

Programming extension: *95 + PASSWORD (default: 31994).
Programming mode syntax

All the programming is done by entering a code then a setting.
Each additional setting entered is followed by a confirmation tone (1 beep). If the parameter is
keyed in wrong, it is followed by 3 beeping tones after which the system returns to its initial
programming state.
There are three different ways to finalize the configuration of a setting and return
to the initial state of the programming mode:
Programming concludes automatically after settings are entered
Pressing the # key after entering the setting
Waiting 5 seconds after entering the setting.
If no code or setting is entered, the system will continue to wait for data input or will assume
that a "null entry" occurred. It will proceed to the next programming step according to the code
first entered.
After a setting is programmed, the display will return to the initial state of the programming
mode. To exit programming mode, simply replace the handset.

Operation
System programming mode using a PC
Issues concerning changes to the default password

Access to the systems programming mode is protected by password to prevent unauthorized
access.
To change the default password (31994) you must enter programming mode:
Programming extension: * 95 +31994 + 80 + XXXXX(new password) + XXXXX (confirm
new password)
Make a note of the new password and store it in a safe place.
If you forget your password, you can use the following code sequence to regain ac-
cess for programming:
# + 95 + 31994431.
This information should not be made available to the user.
7.2 System programming mode using a PC

The system CD contains the software packages required for installation with a PC (see HiPath
1100 applications on page 7-333).
Basic hardware requirements:

IBM-type PC, Pentium processor 333 MHz (minimum)
128 MB RAM (minimum)
Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows ME or Windows XP
SVGA Color Monitor, 800x600 resolution (minimum)
Free disk space: 150 MB (minimum).

Operation
Connections:
Connections PC <--> HiPath 1100 Page

Local Connection 7-293
With a V.24 Serial Interface 7-293
With a USB Interface 7-281
With the LAN interface module 7-283
With optiPoint 7-287
Remote or local connections 7-333
With an Analog modem 7-290
With an ISDN modem via S0 module 7-293
7.2.1 Local Connection
7.2.1.1 V.24 Serial Interface

For this option, first install the HiPath 1100 applications then set the CommServer.
Procedure:
1. Check that the HiPath 1100 system is ON
2. Insert the HiPath 1100 CD in the CD drive
If Auto-Run is not configured, go to the Windows Start menu, click Run and then select the
Browse button in the dialog box. Open the SETUP.EXE file on the CD drive.
3. In the Setup window, select the language you want to use
4. A window will appear where you can select the software to be installed
5. Select the software components you wish to install and install them. For programming the
HiPath 1100 system, the following applications must be installed:
HiPath 1100 Manager
CommServer (installs automatically).
6. After each component is installed, a message is displayed indicating that the installation
was completed successfully. Click "Next" every time it appears
7. Click "Finish" to close the installation window. This completes the software installation.
Restart the PC if Windows requires this.

Operation
8. After installation is completed, configure the Communication Server (see Figure 7-1).
Right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows status bar and select Properties. Specify
these settings:
Connection Type
Baud Rate 19200 (Default) / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 baud
COM port
Figure 7-1 Communication Server Properties - Configuring a V.24 Serial Interface
9. The CommServer will be dialed automatically when an application is enabledHiPath 1100.
The V.24 Serial Interface may not be used if a LAN interface module is installed in
the PABX.

Operation
7.2.1.2 USB Interface

In this case there are two possibilities: USB Interface or USB Interface + CAPI Interface.
Possible USB
Configurations
HiPath 1100 Applications

Manager Software Transmission
Billing Status Monitor
CommServer
CallBridge
for Data
USB
HiPath
1100
USB
Figure 7-2 Possible USB Configurations
In order to perform HiPath 1100 administration using a computer and a USB interface, you
must install the proper CallBridge for Data USB drivers specific for the HiPath 1100 family. This
allows the computer to communicate with the system. This task must be complete before
installing the HiPath 1100 applications.
Install the required drivers (see Chapter 7, HiPath 1100 USB Drivers ) then start installing the
HiPath 1100 applications:
Procedure:
2. In the Setup window, select the language you want to use.
Once the language has been selected, all corresponding country-specific settings will be
established.

Operation
HiPath 1100 Manager
Windows may display a message to restart the computer. If this occurs, restart the
computer.
Right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows status bar and select "Properties":
Figure 7-3 Communication Server Properties - Configuring a USB Connection
8. The CommServer will be dialed automatically when an application is enabledHiPath 1100.

Operation
7.2.1.3 LAN interface modules

This option uses LAN access via the ADSL, SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC or ADSLIM modules.
Install the HiPath 1100 applications from the CD, restart the PC, then make the necessary
settings on the HiPath 1100 Manager for connection with the CommServer.
Procedure:
4. Install your selected software components sequentially. For programming the HiPath 1100
system, the following applications must be installed:
HiPath 1100 Manager and
computer.
7. ADSL module - After installation is completed, configure the CommServer (see Figure 7-
4). Right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows status bar and select Properties.
1. Select ADSL connection
2. Configure the IP of the ADSL module:
If the "Get IP # Automatically" checkbox is enabled, the CommServer will
automatically be configured with the IP of the default gateway of the PC, if not, the IP
of the ADSL module must be entered manually into the CommServer (Default
10.0.0.1).

Operation
Figure 7-4 Properties of the CommServer - Connections ADSL module
8. SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC or ADSLIM modules - On the HiPath 1100 V7.0, you do not
need to use the CommServer installed in your machine, as these modules already have a
CommServer installed, known as eCommServer. You may therefore make an authorized
LAN access to the PABX of an external application such as those that use the SNMP
platform.
Configure the IP address and Port of the LAN interface module in the HiPath 1100 Manager
in Tools/CommServe Configuration. menu
Defaults:
Port:3100
9. When a HiPath 1100 application is activated, the server starts automatically.
The V.24 Serial Interface may not be used if a LAN interface module is installed in
the PABX.

Operation
7.2.1.4 optiPoint Interface

optiPoint 500 telephones that feature a USB Interface (Advance, Basic/Standard/Economy,
Entry) can be used as a USB interface for performing administrative tasks.
In this case there are two ways to connect via optiPoint: VCOM or CAPI.
a) Connections via optiPoint VCOM: Up to 8 optiPoint telephones can be connected to
the system at the same time, although at lower speeds.
For this type of connection you can install the USB Administration drivers or USB
Administration + CAPI interface drivers
b) Connections via optiPoint CAPI: This connection via optiPoint is up to four times faster
than an optiPoint VCOM connection (item a), therefore only one administration
connection may be made each time. No other administration connections via optiPoint
CAPI or remote ISDN connections to the system will be made while there is a CAPI
connection running.
USB administration + CAPI interface drivers must be installed for this type of
connection.
Possible USB
Configurations

Billing Status Monitor
CommServer
CallBridge
for Data
USB
UP0/E
HiPath
1100
optiPoint telephones
Maximum number of interface
connections - 8
Figure 7-5 Possible optiPoint Configurations

Operation
To perform HiPath 1100 administrative tasks on a computer using an optiPoint interface, you
must first install the appropriate USB drivers for optiPoint, according to the connection to be
used (see Chapter 7, optiPoint USB drivers ) and start installing the applications HiPath 1100:
Procedure:
2. In the Setup window, select the language you want to use.
Once the language has been selected, all corresponding country-specific settings will be
established.
HiPath 1100 Manager
computer.
Right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows status bar and select Properties:

Operation
a) Connections via optiPoint VCOM:
Figure 7-6 CommServer Properties - optiPoint Connection Configuration .
b) Connections via optiPoint CAPI:

Connection Type: ISDN Connection
Phone #: 800
Your MSN: --- (There is no need fill this in)
Figure 7-7 CommServer Properties - optiPoint CAPI Configuration.

Operation
7.2.2 Remote / Local connection
7.2.2.1 External Analog modem

For this option, the HiPath 1100 applications are installed. After restarting the computer
configure the settings on CommServer, HiPath 1100 Manager and the HiPath 1100 system.
Procedure:
1. Connect the analog modem (to connect the modems extension, see item 4.7 - Connecting
extensions to the systems internal MDF) as follows:
REMOTE HiPath 1100

ADMINISTRATION Public Network ADMINISTERED
LOCATION
ANALOG MODEM
EXTERNAL or INTERNAL LINE
HiPath 1100

Serial Extension
Billing Status Monitor Cable of the
ANALOG MODEM
CommServer EXTERNAL LINE
Figure 7-8 External analog modem connection


Operation
7. Select Close to close the installation window. Installation is then completed and the
computer has to be restarted.
8. After restarting the computer, check the default modem (US Robotics) configuration on the
HiPath 1100 Manager and change the following settings to match your modem (see the
modems manual, if necessary):
Figure 7-9 HiPath 1100 Manager Configuration - Analog modem

Operation
9. On the remote HiPath 1100 system, compare the default modem configuration (US
Robotics) with your modem configuration (see the modems manual). If necessary, change
the following information:
Figure 7-10 CommServer Configuration - Remote Analog modem
10. After exiting the CommServer, the server will restart automatically whenever a HiPath 1100
application is activated.

Operation
If you use the Trendnet V.92 56K - TFM-560X or D-Link V.90 56K - DFM - 560EL
modem you will need to use the analog modem adapter cable (see Adapter cable
for analog modem on page 3-118) and configure/check of the start-up and reset
code of the modem connected to the switch using HiPath 1100 Manager.
If the modem is connected to the PC (remote modem), the modem cable should be
used and the initialization code set using CommServer.
This information can be obtained from the modems instruction manual.
In the Reset field the default setting for these modems is as follows:
US-ROBOTICS: ATZH0
TrendNet: ATZH0
D-LINK: +++,,,ATHATZH0
In the Initialization field, the default setting for these modems is as follows:
US-ROBOTICS: AT&F0&B1F1S0=0
TrendNet: AT&F0&B1F1&D0S0=0.
D-LINK: AT&F0&D0S0=0
7.2.2.2 ISDN modem via S0 module

The system can be administered remotely or locally through an ISDN interface.
For this option, only the HiPath 1100 applications are installed. After restarting the computer
(if Windows prompts you to restart the computer) configure the settings for the CommServer.

Operation
HiPath 1100 Applications HiPath 1100 Applications

Manager Software Transmission Manager Software Transmission
Billing Status Monitor Billing Status Monitor
CAPI CAPI
CommServer CommServer
driver driver
ISDN ISDN
Card Card
HiPath
1100
S0 S0
inte OR ext S0
S0 BUS Trunk
NTBA
Figure 7-11 ISDN Configuration options
Procedure:
2. Insert the system CD in the CD drive.
7. Select Close to close the installation window. Installation is then completed and the
computer has to be restarted.

Operation
Driver Installation
8. Following the boot sequence, configure the CommServer. Right-click the CommServer
icon on the Windows status bar and select Properties. Specify these settings:
Connection Type: ISDN connection via S0 Trunk
Phone #: telephone number to be dialed by the CommServer.
Your MSN: MSN of the CommServer.
or
Connection Type: ISDN Connection via S0 BUS
Phone #: 800
Your MSN: you do not need to fill this in.
Figure 7-12 CommServer Properties - Configuration of ISDN connections
9. When a HiPath 1100 application is activated, the server starts automatically.
7.3 Driver Installation
7.3.1 HiPath 1100 USB Drivers

Two types of USB drivers can be installed for the HiPath 1100 system: Administration USB
driver or Administration + CAPI Interface USB driver.
If all you need is administration of the HiPath 1100 system, install the Administration USB
drivers package. If you wish to use CAPI services, in addition to performing HiPath 1100
system administration, you will need to install the Administration + CAPI Interface drivers.

Operation
Driver Installation
Administrator access is required for performing the installation under Windows

2000/XP.
If other PABX drivers or an ISDN card are already installed on the system, they must
be completely uninstalled before installing any other driver.
7.3.1.1 Installation Setup

1. Make sure the HiPath 1100 system is turned on (do not connect the USB cable at this point.
This should be done during driver installation)
2. Insert the HiPath 1100 CD in the PCs CD drive
3. Select USB Drivers option
Figure 7-13 Installation Setup - USB Drivers
4. Select the type of driver to install

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-14 Installation Setup - USB Drivers
5. Follow the installers instructions. For each option there is a text box describing how to
proceed.
7.3.1.2 Installing USB Drivers

Perform the installation that matches your operating system:
Operating System
Windows 98 SE 7-297
Windows ME 7-301
Windows 2000 7-304
Windows 2003 7-307
Windows XP 7-310
Windows 98 SE
Additional system components may need to be installed during driver installation.

So please have the Windows 98 CD available.
1. Connect the HiPath 1100 system to the computer

2. The Add New Hardware wizard will appear. A message will appear indicating that Setup
will search for new Composite USB device drivers. Click "Next" to proceed.

Operation
Driver Installation
3. Select the option "Search for the best driver for your device (Recommended)" and click
"Next" to confirm
Figure 7-15 Windows 98 SE - USB Driver Installation
4. Select the Specify a location checkbox and click Browse to select the directory where
the uncompressed driver is stored. Drivers can be found on the CD, in the folder
SoftwareUSB Drivers. The driver is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If the
Administration driver is selected, the directory path will be
C:\Temp\HiPath1100_Adm_Drivers_040. If you select the Administration + CAPI Interface,
the directory path will be C:TempHiPath1100_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_040. Select a folder and
click "Next"

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-16 Windows 98 SE - USB drivers installation location
5. A message will appear informing that a driver has been found. Click "Next" to proceed.
6. The installation of the USB drivers will be confirmed. Click Finish
7. A message will appear informing that HiPath 1000is being searched for. Repeat driver
installation procedures for USB interface devices (Steps 1 to 4).
To install administration + CAPI Interface drivers, follow these steps:
8. During installation of the HiPath 1000 (CAPI Interface) configure these two settings:
9. In the following window, select "EURO-ISDN (DSS1)" and click "Next":

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-17 Windows 98 SE - selection for ISDN
10. Enter an available extension number in the "Phone # (MSN)" field (for HiPath 1120/1150
switches the default extension is 10 and for HiPath 1190 the default extension is 100), free.
Click "Next" to confirm. The same will appear again. Click "Next" one more time without
entering anything in any field:
Figure 7-18 Windows 98 SE - MSN Number
11. The installation of the USB drivers is now complete. CAPI applications installation will now
start automatically (see CAPI Application setup on page 7-331).

Operation
Driver Installation
Windows ME
3. Choose "Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)" and click "Next." Click "Next" to
proceed.
Figure 7-19 Windows ME - Specify installation folder.
4. Select the Search for the best CAPI for your device (Recommended) checkbox then
select the Specify a location checkbox. Under Browse, select the directory where the
decompressed driver is stored. Drivers can be found in the \Software\USB Drivers folder
of the CD. The driver is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If the Administration driver is
selected, the directory path will be C:\Temp\HiPath1100_Adm_Drivers_040. If you select
the Administration + CAPI Interface, the directory path will be
C:TempHiPath1100_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_040. Select a folder and click "Next"

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-20 Windows ME - USB/CAPI installation location.
6. The installation of the USB drivers will be confirmed. Click "Finish."
7. A message will appear informing that HiPath 1000is being searched for. Repeat driver
installation procedures for USB interface devices (Steps 1 to 6)
To install administration + CAPI Interface drivers, follow these steps:
8. A message will appear indicating that the best driver for the hardware has been found.
Click "Next" to proceed.

Operation
Driver Installation
In the following window, select "EURO-ISDN (DSS1)" and click "Next:
Figure 7-21 Windows ME - selection for ISDN
Enter an available extension number in the "Phone # (MSN)" field (for HiPath 1120/1150
the default extension is 10 and for HiPath 1190 the default extension is 100). Click "Next"
to confirm. The same will appear again. Click "Next" one more time without entering
anything in any field:
Figure 7-22 Windows SE - MSN Number

Operation
Driver Installation
Windows 2000
You must have administrators access privileges to install any software

2. The Found New Hardware Wizard window appears so that new drivers can be installed.
3. Select the "Search for the best driver for your device" option and click "Next."
Figure 7-23 Windows 2000 - Driver location

Operation
Driver Installation
4. If it is not already selected, check the "Specify a location" box, then click "Next."
5. A second window will open. Under Browse, select the directory where the decompressed
driver is stored. Drivers can be found in the \Software\USB Drivers folder of the CD. The
driver is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If the Administration driver is selected, the
directory path will be C:TempHiPath1100_Adm_Drivers_040. If you select the
Administration + CAPI Interface, the directory path will be C:TempHiPath1100_AdmCAPI_
Drivers_040. Select a folder and click "Next"
6. A message will appear indicating that a driver has been found. Click "Next" to proceed.
7. A message will appear to the effect that the software to be installed does not have a
Microsoft digital signature. Acknowledge the message by clicking "OK."

Operation
Driver Installation
8. The HiPath 1000 (CAPI Interface) installation will now be launched. The window with the
warning about a Microsoft digital signature will appear twice. Click "OK" every time it
appears.
9. In the ISDN - HiPath 1000 window, select European ISDN (DSS1) then click Next.
Figure 7-26 Windows 2000 - ISDN selection
10. Enter the MSN-CAPI number (see Table 6-3 on page 6-206) (for HiPath 1120/1150 the
default extension is 10 and for HiPath 1190 the default extension is 100) in "Add," in the
Multi-subscriber Numbers" box.
Figure 7-27 Windows 2000 - MSN

Operation
Driver Installation
Windows 2003
Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the HiPath 1100 system to the computer using a USB cable
2. The Found New Hardware Wizard window will appear so that new drivers can be installed.
Choose "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" Click "Next" to proceed.
3. A second window will open. Select Search for the best CAPI in these locations then select
Include this location in the search. Under Browse, select the directory where the

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-29 Windows 2003 - Drivers installation location
4. Once this is completed, the installation of the HiPath 1000 will start A message will appear
(three times) to the effect that the software installation did not pass the Windows logo test.
Click "Next" every time it appears
Figure 7-30 Windows 2003 - ISDN

Operation
Driver Installation

8. A message will appear that HiPath 1000 drivers are being searched for. Repeat driver
9. Click "Next" to proceed.
10. A message will appear twice to the effect that the driver does not have a Windows logo.
Click "Continue" every time this message will appear.

Operation
Driver Installation
Windows XP
Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the HiPath 1100 system to the computer using a USB cable
Figure 7-32 Windows XP - Driver location

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-33 Windows XP - Driver installation location
4. Once this is completed, the installation of the HiPath 1000 will start A message will appear
(three times) to the effect that the software installation did not pass the Windows logo test.
Click "Next" every time it appears
Figure 7-34 Windows XP - ISDN

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-35 Windows XP - MSN


Operation
Driver Installation
7.3.1.3 CAPI Application setup

CAPI applications installation is very simple and is the same for all Windows operating
systems.
Upon conclusion of USB driver installation, the CAPI applications installation window will
appear. Proceed as follows:
1. In this window, select the language you want to use and click "OK" to confirm.
2. When you see the Welcome screen, click "Next" to proceed. The installation window will
then display the (default) path for installation of the CAPI applications (CallBridge for Data
Utilities). You can choose a different path by selecting "Browse." Click "Next" to proceed.
3. In the following window, create a new program folder or choose an existing folder in which
to store program icons for running the corresponding applications.
4. To complete the installation process, answer the introductory messages by clicking "Next"
Click "Finish" to close the installation window.
The following applications are then installed on your computer:
ISDN Setup Wizard (Windows 98 SE/ME)
CAPI Monitor
Uninstaller
FaxComm + Installation
Loopback Test
Outgoing Numbers Configuration (MSN) (Windows 2000/XP).
Restart the computer after installation of USB drivers and CAPI applications.
The USB drivers are Plug&Play compatible, so that after installation, the HiPath 1100
system may be removed and added again to the computer configuration - by simply
unplugging or connecting the USB cable. The drivers do not need to be reinstalled.
The equipment is ready for operation.
7.3.1.4 Uninstall
For the S0 connection, follow steps 1, 6 and 7 of the procedure
For the USB connection, follow steps 1 through 7 of the procedure below.

Operation
Driver Installation
Procedure:
1. To exit CommServer, right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows Status bar and
select "Exit".
2. Exit all online services for CallBridge for Data that are open
3. Unplug from your computer the USB cable connected to the HiPath 1100 system
4. To remove the USB drivers, proceed as follows:
For FULL removal, use Uninstall, or the Uninstall feature on the CD.
5. Uninstall CallBridge for Data Utilities (if previously installed to use online services or USB
connections), by running the Uninstall program as follows: Start/Programs/CallBridge for
Data Utilities/Uninstall CallBridge for Data Utilities. Once CallBridge for Data Utilities has
been uninstalled, answer "No" when asked if you want to restart your computer, and
proceed with step 6.
6. Uninstall all HiPath 1100 components as follows:
Start/Settings/Control Panel/Software, then click on "Remove Software"
7. Next, restart your computer.
7.3.2 optiPoint USB drivers

There are two types of optiPoint USB drivers that can be installed for the HiPath 1100 system:
Administration USB driver or Administration USB driver + optiPoint CAPI interface.
If all you need is administration of the HiPath 1100 system, install the Administration USB
drivers. If in addition to HiPath 1100 system administration you wish to use CAPI services with
an optiPoint interface or perform CAPI administration using an optiPoint set, you must install
the optiPoint Administration + CAPI Interface USB drivers.
Administrator access is required for performing the installation under Windows

2000/XP.
If different PABX drivers or an ISDN card are already installed on the system, they
must be completely uninstalled before installing optiPoints "CallBridge for Data."

Operation
Driver Installation
Procedure:
7.3.2.1 Using the Installer

2. Insert the HiPath 1100 CD in the PCs CD drive
3. Connect optiPoint to your computer using the USB cable. A window will announce that new
hardware has been found
4. Follow the Installers instructions. For each option there is a text box describing how to
proceed.
7.3.2.2 Manual Installation

1. Make sure the HiPath 1100 system is turned on.
2. Insert the HiPath1100 CD into the CD drive
3. Connect the system to your computer using the USB cable. A window will announce that
new hardware has been found
4. The New Hardware wizard will appear. Select Install from a list or specific location (on
Windows XP. This may be worded differently in other versions) and check the following:
5. Select Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in the
search. Drivers can be found in the \Software\USB Drivers folder of the CD. The drive is
decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If Admin is selected, use
C:TempoptiPoint_Adm_Drivers_039 directory. If Admin + CAPI is selected, use
CTempoptiPoint_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_039. Select a folder and enter to confirm.
6. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, a message will repeatedly announce that the
software being installed does not have a Microsoft digital signature. Answer the prompts
by clicking Yes or Continue
7. Select Finish to complete the installation
8. The Found New Hardware wizard window will open. Select Install from a list or specific
location (Windows XP option - this may be worded differently in other versions. Enter to
confirm.
9. Select Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in the
search. Drivers can be found in the \Software\USB Drivers folder of the CD. The drive is
decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If Admin is selected, use
CTempoptiPoint_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_039. Select a folder and enter to confirm.

Operation
Driver Installation
10. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, a message will repeatedly announce that the
software being installed does not have a Microsoft digital signature. Answer the prompts
by clicking Yes or Continue
11. Select Finish to complete the installation.
Perform the installation that matches your operating system:
Operating System
Windows 98 SE 7-316
Windows ME 7-319
Windows 2000 7-322
Windows 2003 7-326
Windows XP 7-328
Windows 98 SE
Additional system components may need to be installed during driver installation.

So please have the Windows 98 CD available.

3. Select the "Search for the best driver for your device (Recommended)" option and click
"Next" to confirm

Operation
Driver Installation
4. Select the Specify a location: checkbox and click Browse to select the directory where
the uncompressed optiPoints CallBridge for Data is located. Drivers can be found in the
\Software\USB Drivers folder of the CD. The drive is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default).
If Admin is selected, use C:TempoptiPoint_Adm_Drivers_039 directory. If Admin + CAPI is
selected, use CTempoptiPoint_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_039. Select a folder and click "Next"

Operation
Driver Installation
6. A message will appear informing that optiPoint is being searched for. Repeat hardware
driver installation (steps 1 through 4)
To install administration drivers + CAPI optiPoint Interface, please follow these steps:
7. During installation of optiPoint (CAPI Interface) configure these two settings:
In the following window, select "EURO-ISDN (DSS1)" and click "Next:
Figure 7-38 Windows 98 SE - selection for ISDN
the valid extension range X-Y). Click "Next" to confirm. The same will appear again. Click
"Next" one more time without entering anything in any field:

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-39 Windows 98 SE - MSN Number
Windows ME
3. Choose "Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)" and click "Next." Click "Next" to
proceed.

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-40 Windows ME - Specify installation folder
4. Select the Search for the best CAPI for your device (Recommended) checkbox then
select the Specify a location checkbox. Under Browse, select the directory where the
of the CD. The drive is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If Admin is selected, use
CTempoptiPoint_AdmCAPI_ Drivers_039. Select a folder and click "Next"
Figure 7-41 Windows ME - Specify installation folder

Operation
Driver Installation
7. A message will appear informing that optiPoint is being searched for. Repeat hardware
driver installation (steps 1 through 6):
To install administration drivers + CAPI optiPoint Interface, follow these steps:
8. During installation of optiPoint (CAPI Interface) configure these two settings:
9. A message will appear indicating that the best driver for the hardware has been found.
In the following window, select "EURO-ISDN (DSS1)" and click "Next":
Figure 7-42 Windows ME - selection for ISDN
the valid extension range X-Y). Click "Next" to confirm. The same will appear again. Click
"Next" one more time without entering anything in any field:

Operation
Driver Installation
Figure 7-43 Windows SE - MSN Number
Windows 2000
Proceed as follows:
2. The Found New Hardware Wizard window appears so that new drivers can be installed.
3. Select the "Search for the best driver for your device" option and click "Next."

Operation
Driver Installation

Operation
Driver Installation
4. If it is not already selected, check the "Specify a location" box, then click "Next."
5. A second window will open. Under Browse, select the directory where the decompressed
driver is stored. Drivers can be found in the \Software\USB Drivers folder of the CD. The
drive is decompressed in C:\Temp (Default). If Admin is selected, use
6. A message will appear indicating that a driver has been found. Click "Next" to proceed.
7. A message will appear to the effect that the software to be installed does not have a
Microsoft digital signature. Acknowledge the message by clicking "OK."

Operation
Driver Installation
8. The optiPoint (CAPI Interface) installation will now be launched. The window with the
warning about a Microsoft digital signature will appear twice. Click "OK" every time it
appears.
9. In the ISDN - optiPoint window, select European ISDN (DSS1) then click Next.
Figure 7-47 Windows 2000 - ISDN selection
valid extension range is X-Y) in "Add," in the Multi-subscriber Numbers" box.

Operation
Driver Installation
Windows 2003
Proceed as follows:

Operation
Driver Installation
4. Once this is completed, the installation of the optiPoint driver will start A message will
appear (three times) to the effect that the software installation did not pass the Windows
logo test. Click "Continue" every time this message will appear.
5. In the ISDN - optiPoint window, select European ISDN (DSS1) then click Next
Figure 7-51 Windows 2003 - ISDN
6. Enter the MSN-CAPI number (see Table 6-3 on page 6-206) (valid extension range is X-Y)
in "Add," in the Multi-subscriber Numbers" box.

Operation
Driver Installation

Windows XP
Proceed as follows:

Operation
Driver Installation

Operation
Driver Installation
4. Once this is completed, the installation of the optiPoint driver will start A message will
appear (three times) to the effect that the software installation did not pass the Windows
logo test. Click "Continue" every time this message will appear.
5. In the ISDN - optiPoint window, select European ISDN (DSS1) then click Next
Figure 7-55 Windows XP - ISDN
6. Enter the MSN-CAPI number (see Table 6-3 on page 6-206) (valid extension range is X-Y)
in "Add," in the Multi-subscriber Numbers" box.
Figure 7-56 Windows XP - MSN

Operation
Driver Installation

7.3.2.3 CAPI Application setup

CAPI application driver installation is very simple and is the same for all Windows operating
systems.
Upon conclusion of USB driver installation, the CAPI applications installation window will
appear. Proceed as follows:
1. In this window, select the language you want to use and click "OK" to confirm.
2. When you see the Welcome screen, click "Next" to proceed. The installation window will
then display the (default) path for installation of the CAPI applications (CallBridge for Data
Utilities). You can choose a different path by selecting "Browse." Click "Next" to proceed.
3. In the following window, create a new program folder or choose an existing folder in which
to store program icons for running the corresponding applications.
4. To complete the installation process, answer the introductory messages by clicking "Next"
Click "Finish" to close the installation window.
The following applications are then installed on your computer:
ISDN Setup Wizard (Windows 98 SE/ME)
CAPI Monitor
Uninstaller
FaxComm + Installation
Loopback Test
Outgoing Numbers Configuration (MSN) (Windows 2000/XP)
.
Restart the computer after installation of USB drivers and CAPI applications.

Operation
Driver Installation
The USB drivers are Plug&Play compatible, so that after installation, the optiPoint
system may be removed and added again to the computer configuration - by simply
unplugging or connecting the USB cable. The drivers do not need to be reinstalled.
The equipment is ready for operation.
7.3.2.4 Uninstall
For the S0 connection, follow steps 1, 6 and 7 of the procedure
For the USB connection, follow steps 1 through 7 of the procedure below.
Procedure:
1. To exit CommServer, right-click the CommServer icon on the Windows Status bar and
select Finish.
2. Exit all online services for optiPoint CallBridge for Data
3. Disconnect the computer USB cable from the optiPoint system
4. To remove the USB drivers, proceed as follows:
For FULL removal, use Uninstall, or the Uninstall feature on the CD.
5. Uninstall CallBridge for Data Utilities (if previously installed to use online services or USB
connections), by running the Uninstall program as follows: Start/Programs/CallBridge for
Data Utilities/Uninstall CallBridge for Data Utilities. Once CallBridge for Data Utilities has
been uninstalled, answer "No" when asked if you want to restart your computer, and
proceed with step 6.
6. Uninstall all HiPath 1100 components as follows:
Start/Settings/Control Panel/Software, then click on "Remove Software"
7. Next, restart your computer.

Operation
HiPath 1100 applications
7.4 HiPath 1100 applications
Aspects to Consider:
The HiPath 1100 Version 7.0 application installation overwrites any previous
installations of HiPath 1100. No messages will be displayed during the process to
warn the user that previous versions of HiPath 1100 are being removed
Both versions are supported - a HiPath 1100 version 5.2 or 6.0 PABX can be
managed using HiPath 1100 Version 7.0, as they are compatible
You cannot have different versions installed in the same computer. Otherwise,
neither will work.
7.4.1 CTI Functionality

When the system is connected to a computer, system features can be executed from the PC.
The functionality provided by the connection between a telephone system and a PC is known
as CTI (Computer Telephony Integration).
For example, CTI functionality and other compatible MS-TAPI applications can be enabled by
TAPI (Telephony Applications Programming Interface) drivers. TAPI drivers are interfaces
between a Windows operating system and a TAPI-compatible telephone system. If a previous
version (ESL or HiPath 1100) Tapi driver is already installed, you will need to update it to a
HiPath 1100 V7.0 Tapi driver.
TAPI only monitors physical ports. To operate correctly, a DISA feature must use
special ports, and those cannot be monitored. If a physical port is used when the
DISA feature is active, the TAPI will be able to monitor it.
If the system is connected to a PC running as a LAN server, all network clients will also have
CTI capability available.
Comm Server:
This is an application that receives data from the system through a serial port and then
distributes the data to different applications.
Call detail recording packets
TAPI packets
Data administration packets with the administrative tool

Operation
CDR data are sent to the CDR application (Call Detail Report Manager) through TCP/IP
sockets. CDR displays CDR information on the PC screen and stores it in text file format. It also
makes CDR data available to a printer or a serial port, for example, for billing using the Call
Report software.
Events for Call Detail Records received from the system are sent through TAPI messages to a
TSP (TAPI Server Provider) using TCP/IP sockets, to provide data to other applications.
7.4.2 SNMP
The SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol - is a TCP/IP protocol that provides a user-
friendly platform for managing software for systems connected to the TCP/IP network. The
SNMP is used practically as a "Management agent" on the HiPath 1100, allowing central
monitoring and management of the PABX.
Each PABX managed by the SNMP has a set of variables that store information on its current
state. This volume of data managed by the SNMP is defined in the MIBs - Management
Information Bases. MIBs are data models that describe all the necessary information for
managing the network.
To be able to access this information, you need to install and connect the LAN ports of the
SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC or ADSLIM modules to the TCP/IP network. That way, any available
information may be accessed from external management applications such as HP Open View.
In other words, the PABX is monitored by management software run in a server station. The
SNMP service will provide information to the PABX via the Agent when it receives requests
from the Manager connected via the TCP/IP network. The Agents and Managers communicate
using SNMP messages that control the external applications.
A new settings folder has been created in the Manager tool to allow the user to configure the
IP of the new ADSL module, enable the SNMP and configure the Community and TRAP
community.

Operation
Figure 7-57 SNMP folder
SNMP messages
The SNMP messages used for communication between the SNMP management agent
(HiPath 1100) and the external applications are controlled by the following commands:
Get, used when the manager requests the agent to obtain data.
Get Next, used when the manager requests the agent to obtain a sequential reading of
data.
Set, used when the manager requests the agent to alter an item of data.
Trap, used by the agent to communicate a previously defined event to the manager.
There is an integrated mechanism to manage SNMP "traps" if a class B error occurs. The
SNMP management agent assesses the error messages, and if they have a corresponding
definition, certain "traps" are put into place sent as groups of data to a configurable IP address.
A maximum of five applications are available that support SNMP version 1.0, such as the HP
Open View.
This option will only be active in HiPath 1100 Manager if the SLIMC, SADSLIM,
LIMC or ADSLIM modules are configured.

Operation
7.4.3 HiPath 1100 Manager

The HiPath 1100 Manager is an administration software designed for programming HiPath
1100 systems quickly and easily using a graphical interface without the need to know
programming codes.
The HiPath 1100 Manager can access the switch as follows:
Locally: Connecting a USB interface, an optiPoint 500 UP0/E interface, or a V.24 interface
Remotely: The system can be accessed locally through a LAN as long as there is a
network PC connected to the HiPath 1100 via serial interface, USB interface or an ADSL
module
Offline Programming Mode: Allows you to view, edit and store a HiPath 1100 database on
a PC that is not currently connected to the PABX and later transfer it to the PABX.
You can also update the HiPath 1100 software using the Software Update then store the
database with the systems settings.
If the database has been previously saved in earlier versions and you want to update
the database to HiPath 1100 V7.0, all you need to do is restore the *.bup file and the
system will run an automatic update. Once the restore process is completed, a
popup message will appear informing the user of the changes resulting from the
restore process.
When using remote administration over an ISDN digital line, where no traffic is
detected between the system and the remote programmer, the system can be
configured to terminate the connection after a specified period of time (1 to 60
minutes) or to maintain the connection indefinitely. The default timeout setting is 30
minutes.
Read the HiPath 1100 Manager Help file before proceeding with this operation.
7.4.4 ADSL settings
7.4.4.1 ADSL module

The installation CD contains certain software programs, in release 2.6 or higher, to help you to
configure the module.
General Information:
TCP/IP protocol

Operation
Default IP: 10.0.0.1

Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0.
If you need to reset the IP or Subnet Mask, enter code 013 for "Restoring default
LAN interface settings" after which the IP ADSL module will be 10.0.0.1.
ADSL router Software Update

The ADSL Router Software Update is a program used to update the module along with the IMG
file.
To perform the update, the ADSL line should be switched off and the system reset by pulling
out the AC power supply cable. Once you have reinserted the AC cable, wait approximately 2
minutes for the system to stabilize and start up.
Figure 7-58 SW Router ADSL firmware update
ADSL router Config

After you have updated the software, the ADSL module must be configured according to the
customers needs using this tool.

Operation
Figure 7-59 ADSL router configuration SW
Checking the version of the ADSL SW

To check which version of the SW is loaded in the ADSL module, please proceed as follows:
1. Connect a PC to the Module;
2. Open a command prompt in Windows (DOS prompt);
3. Run this command: telnet X.X.X.X (where X.X.X.X is the IP address configured in the
ADSL module, in this case 10.0.0.1);

Operation
4. Hit Enter. If the module has the correct version of SW, the message Siemens Ltda /
euroset Line ADSL Router - Software Version 8 1r110k / Login will appear. After this
procedure is complete, close this window.
TCP/IP protocol
Default IP: 192.168.254.253
Configuration
The system is configured using a web interface, which can be accessed via any web browser
such as Internet Explorer.
Figure 7-60 Configuring the ADSL via web Browser
The web interface is the Siemens Administrative Console and is accessed using the default
address http://192.168.254.253 on the web browser. The first screen will give the version of the
Firmware (for example: WX700018) and the MAC address of the module.

Operation
For other configurations, you should enter with the Username and Password. The window
requesting the information appears if another link of the web page is accessed.
Figure 7-61 Password and Username window for access via web browser
The default Username is admin and the Password is 31994.
Changing the Password

We recommend that you change the default Password after your first access. Follow the link:
>>System<< >>Password Change<<.
Figure 7-62 Changing the default Password
After you have changed the password, press Save Changes.

Operation
Changing the IP address

Change the IP address using the link : >>Network<< - >>LAN<<.
Figure 7-63 Changing the default IP address
When you have changed the IP address, NetMask and Gateway, press >>Change<< to
confirm the changes. This configuration will be saved once you press Save & Reboot.
After rebooting, you will not be able to access the Siemens administrative Con-
sole for 30 seconds and the new IP address must be inserted into the web browser
to access the web interface.

Operation
Default configuration
The user can retrieve the default factory settings using the link: >>System<< - >>Reset<<.
Figure 7-64 Default factory settings
To return to the default settings, click on Factory Defaults.
This will reboot the module and you will not be able to access the Siemens admin-
istrative Console for 30 seconds and the default IP address (192.168.254.253)
must be inserted into the web browser to access the web interface

Operation
Upgrade Firmware
Follow this link to upgrade the firmware: >>System<< - >>Firmware Upgrade<<.
Figure 7-65 Selecting a Firmware file for Upgrade
Press Browse to select the .bin file to update the firmware.
Check whether the selected file is a valid firmware file. The web interface accepts
all file types, and this could cause the module to malfunction. Software may only be
updated by users with an administrator password.
To update the old ADSL module, the firmware file ends with .img.
To update the new ADSL module, the firmware file ends with .bin.

Operation
Once you have selected the file with the correct version of firmware, proceed upgrading by
pressing >>Upgrade<<.
Figure 7-66 Firmware Upgrade
The operation is complete when the word done appears on the web page.
Updating the firmware returns the module to the default factory configuration. This
will reboot the module and you will not be able to access the Siemens administra-
tive Console for 30 seconds and the default IP address (192.168.254.253) must be
inserted into the web browser to access the web interface
7.4.4.3 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem

Once you have installed the ADSL access to you provider and the connections to HiPath 1100,
you may need to adjust the parameters of the SADSLIM (HiPath 1120) and ADSLIM
(HiPath1150/1190/1190R) modules of the ADSL modem.
You can also access the Speed Stream Modem configuration using the web interface. The
default IP address is 192.168.254.254 and can be accessed from any web browser, such as
MS Internet Explorer.

Operation
Figure 7-67 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem
The first time you access the service, you will need to set a Username and Password.
Username: admin
Password: 31994 or admin
With this Username and Password, the user may then login to the modem.
Figure 7-68 Login to the Speed Stream Modem

Operation
Once you are logged in, access to modem configuration is enabled.
Figure 7-69 Configuring the Speed Stream Modem
7.4.4.4 Returning to factory settings

You can restart the modem using the Reboot option in the ADSL Modem WebServer, or reset
the Router to the factory default using the Reset button. Reboot when the Router needs
resetting without losing the current settings.
Select Router reboot in Tools>Reboot in the left hand panel of the Web interface. The System
Reboot window will appear.
The System Reboot window will continue to be displayed throughout the entire process.
When the Router has finished rebooting, the system will display the System Summary
window

Operation
Figure 7-70 Returning to factory settings
Reset the ADSL modem to system default when you need to recover default settings. This may
be necessary when the customers configuration does not work as expected, when you want to
configure new settings or when the router does not appear to be working properly.
This option resets all the custom configurations, users and passwords on your mo-
dem.
For further information, consult the SpeedStream 4100 User Manual in the installa-
tion CD.
7.4.4.5 COMGATE
To use the new ADSL module in systems older than HiPath V7.0 (i.e. V6.0 and V5.2), you need
to use COMGATE mode. This mode allows the module to be accessed in the same way in
systems that predate HiPath V7.0.

Operation
The default connection configuration of the application of the new ADSL module is configured
for HiPath V7.0. To use COMGATE mode, configure the new ADSL module using the following
link: >>Network<<->>HiPath<<.
Figure 7-71 Access to COMGATE
Through this link you can verify the current configuration and change it for versions 5.2 or 6.0
by clicking >>Change<<.
Press >>Save & Reboot<< and the system will restart in COMGATE mode. Configuration in
the web interface works in the same way as explained above. Only the connection with the
HiPath 1100 will be made using the CommServer and will use the IP addresses defined in the
web interface and the port.

Operation
Figure 7-72 CommServer Configuration
To connect HiPath 1100 Applications that predate V 7.0, configure the CommServer to ADSL
Connection, and enter with the new address IP 192.168.254.253 and Port 9366.
7.4.4.6 ECOMMSERVER
The eCommServer will be able to operate when a new ADSL module is connected to one of
the following systems: HiPath V 7.0 (HiPath 1120 and HiPath150/1190).
The eCommServer will not be supported by old modules or when a new module is connected
to HiPath V6.0 or previous.
Users will no longer access the eCommServer directly. The eCommServer will be used via
system applications, which will make them transparent to the user.
The CommServer installed in the PC is not used to connect the HiPath V7.0 via the new ADSL
module. Connection is made using the eCommServer.
The application will point directly to the IP of the new module, as in a remote connection. Each
application will be configured to access the eCommServer. For example, configuration in the
Manager tool is made via the Tool bar: Tools\Communication Server Configurations.

Operation
Figure 7-73 Communication Server Configurations
After configuring the IP of the the ADSL module, the application can connect directly to the
eCommServer installed in the module.
7.4.4.7 How to release the ADSL feature in new Countries

1. Send the current settings used for ADSL and also test the same settings in the Module. As
soon as this information, indicating the correct function, is received by the area responsible
([email protected], harold.erbesdobler @siemens.com and
[email protected]), it will be included in the official release documentation of the
ADSL (also stored in the KMOSS) where countries, carriers and configurations are listed.
2. The following sequence will be included in the official release documentation of the ADSL:
1. Do the following if the ADSL is being introduced into a country:
Check whether there is already official documentation in the KMOSS with the
country and carrier configuration;
If such documentation exists, it will be tested and released to the local carrier.
If this configuration is appropriate or if you encounter any problems, inform and
send the details (use the Default form) for the person in charge mentioned above,
who will take any necessary steps (for example, including this in the official
documentation or correcting the problem).
If there is no configuration for your country or carrier in the official documentation
of the ADSL, please proceed as follows:
If you are involved in a field test, contact the person in charge and send the
configuration information (use the Default form ), and the necessary steps will be
taken.

Operation
If you are introducing the ADSL feature into the country or whenever there is a new
operator, there must be an ADSL release for the country. Send the configuration
to the manager of the local product (use the Default form).
The local manager must get in touch with/send this information to:
Mrs. Martha Unterstaller
[email protected]
Hofmannstr. 51
Muenchen
GERMANY
81379
phone: +49 89 722 23090
Mrs. Unterstaller must contact: [email protected], harold.erbesdobler
@siemens.com e [email protected]. They will take any necessary
steps.
3. The next official release of the ADSL (stored in the KMOSS) will include:
Countries, carriers and settings used (when the information is available);
At least one step-by-step example for configuring the ADSL tool, which is based on the
configuration information received;
Instructions concerning the correct sequence and names for introduction by country,
new carriers and field test (already mentioned in this document, Item 2);
If a country or operator is not included in the ADSL release, then the introduction is not
a version of Service/Support;
Support for ADSL of ESL 4.2, HiPath 1100 V5.0 or HiPath 1100 V5.1 does not
guarantee support for HiPath V5.2 or subsequent, except where indicated in the
documentation;
4. The next official release of software, hardware or applications for PABX that mentions
ADSL must make quite clear in the release documentation that:
The ADSL Feature is only released for the countries and carriers mentioned in the
corresponding official ADSL release documentation and those corresponding to the
version mentioned in the KMOSS.
Default form
ADSL settings
1. ADSL interface:
[ ] ADSL OVER POTS G992.1 B
[ ] ADSL OVER POTS G-Lite
Maximal Upstream rate: ______ kbps

Operation
Maximal downstream rate: ______ kbps

2. ATM Interface:
1. VPI: _____
2. VCI: _____
3. Access Protocol
1. Access Protocol Type
[ ] RFC1483 Bridge
[ ] RFC1483 Routed
[ ] PPPoA
[ ] PPPoE
[ ] IpoA
[ ] Other:_____________________
4. IP Services
1. Fixed DHCP provider IP (for RFC1483 Router)
[ . . . ]
2. Fixed DNS provider IP (for RFC1483 Router)
[ . . . ]
5. Special requirements
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
7.4.4.8 Siemens Admin Console

This is an administrative program for programming an ADSL module.
The modules can be configured by accessing their IP number (Default = 192.168.254.253)
from your web browser http://192.168.254.253(Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator, V. 5.0 higher).
The Siemens Admin Console provides a series of "tabs" in which you can check or change
settings.
Default IP of the modem: 192.168.254.254

Operation

Default Gateway of the module: 192.168.254.254
Default User - admin
Password - 31994
Info Tab
Shows general information on the module.
Status Tab
Shows information on the status of the connections:
LAN configuration
Available physical connections
Connections of the ADSL modem.
System Tab
Shows information on the interface:
Password change - changes the access password
Firmware Upgrade - updates the firmware, with an option to select the "Erase JFFS2
partition" checkbox if you wish to delete the previous settings of the module when you
update.
Network Tab
Shows information on the internal configuration of the module.
LAN - shows the current configuration and allows you to change parameters (IP address,
Netmask, Gateway and DHCP Client number).
Hosts - shows the IP addresses and the name of the Hosts set in the module and also
allows you to add or remove existing hosts.
HiPath - shows the current version of the module and allows update to V 5.2, V6.0 or V7.0.
The SLIMC, SADSLIM, LIMC and ADSLIM modules are factory configured to
version 7.0, and may be set to versions 5.2 and 6.0 using the Network -> HiPath tab.

Operation
7.4.4.9 Configuring the SpeedStream 4100 modem

Once you have installed the ADSL access to you provider and the connections to HiPath 1100,
you may need to adjust the parameters of the SADSLIM (HiPath 1120) and ADSLIM
(HiPath1150/1190/1190R) modules of the ADSL modem.
These adjustments can be made by going to their IP number(192.168.254.254 - Default) from
your Web browser http://192.168.254.254 (Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator,
version 5.0 or higher) where you must configure the information of the ADSL and VPI/VCI
protocols used by the operator, DNS, user name and password of the provider.
The ADSL modem used is the Siemens SpeedStream 4100. You can consult the
configuration instructions in the manual which you will find in the Setup and
Installation CD.

Operation
7.4.5 LCR settings

1. Go to Advanced/System Configuration and select LCR;
Figure 7-74 LCR module
2. Go to Advanced/System Configuration/Regional Configuration;

1. Select dialing settings in the C.O.;
2. Select the national and international prefixes;
For example, for Brazil: Prefix + Carrier Code + Destination code
National Prefix: 0;
International Prefix: 00;

Operation
Figure 7-75 LCR module - regional configuration
3. Go to Advanced/LCR and select Create new tab and provide the name;
For example, Table: test, you may create up to 8 tables.

Operation
Figure 7-76 LCR module - creating tables
1. In Destination, click in the rectangle to edit the name of the rule;

2. In Code, click in the rectangle to edit the code (local area or destination code);
3. In Type, select Local, National or International;
1. In the National prefix, the same prefix from Advanced/System configuration/
Regional configuration will be added;
2. In the International prefix, the same prefix from Advanced/System configuration/
Regional configuration will be added;
4. In Trunk group, select the the group of outgoing trunks for the calls;
5. In Carrier, click in the rectangle to edit the name of the Carrier;
6. In Number, click in the rectangle to edit the number of the Carrier;

Operation
Figure 7-77 LCR module - configuring a rule
Example:
Destination) = rule 1
code = 11
Type = National. When National is selected, the National prefix will be added in Code.
Code = 011
Group of trunks = 0
Carrier = Brasil Telecom
Number = 14

Operation
Figure 7-78 LCR module - example of a rule
Now you must define the time interval (start and end), the days and click on Add time
interval.

Operation
Figure 7-79 LCR module - time interval
Example 1
Prefix + carrier code + destination code
The extension takes the phone off of the hook, takes a trunk (hears a false tone) and dials 011+
33335000.
The LCR rule takes the trunk from group ) and dials 0 + 14 + 11 + 33335000 in the trunk.
Example 2
Carrier code + prefix + destination code
33335000.
The LCR rule takes the trunk from group ) and dials 0 + 14 + 11 + 33335000 in the trunk.
Example 3
Prefix + destination code + carrier code

Operation
33335000.
The LCR rule takes the trunk from group ) and dials 0 + 14 + 11 + 33335000.
7.4.5.1 GSM/SIP BOX with LCR support

The controls of the groups of trunks and group of overflow trunks were associated by the carrier
to the opposite destination to those of the versions lower than V7.0. Due to this, all destinations
with a common carrier use the same group. If the user changes the group of trunks associated
to the carrier, all the rules of this carrier change for this group of trunks.
In this new version, the user can configure carriers with the same number, but with different
groups of trunks. See the example:
Figure 7-80 LCR module - GSM/SIP BOX
Note that the carriers are the same but the group of trunks are different. This option is only
possible in version V7.0 or higher.
Each table has its own default carrier. In the previous versions, the default carrier is that of the
system. The default system carrier in the old backups is reflected in all the tables when the
restore operation is carried out (database conversion). Furthermore, when the user selects the
Apply to all regions button, a default carrier is copied to all the tables.
When the user recovers the backup of versions previous to V7.0, and this backup has both
groups of trunks and groups of overflow trunks by destination configured, the groups of trunks
and groups of overflow trunks by destination column will be displayed as read-only. These
columns will show only the information that some destinations are configured as a group of
trunks and/or group of overflow trunks.
7.4.5.2 Importing the LCR from the Telefonsparbuch

Note that this feature may be used for the HiPath 1100 and 1200, but the service should be
available or the site serving the country should provide the file with the LCR settings in the
format defined in www.telefonsparbuch.de.
Two new options are included in the Advanced/LCR folder: importing and exporting LCR files.
When a user imports an LCR file, the existing rules are overwritten. Before this operation is
carried out, a message will appear asking whether the user wishes to keep or lose the carriers
that have already been configured.

Operation
7.4.6 E1 Trunk Manager

The E1 Trunk Manager is an administrative program for configuring a TME1 module with E1
CAS access.
Hardware Requirements:
Serial interface communications (COM port).
With the E1 Trunk Manager you can do the following:
Download software and databases
Remove traces
Select the softwares type of connection to the module (local or via modem)
Select a COM port
Select a Country when installing the program, including the appropriate protocol and CAS
signaling (e.g., line signaling (1bit-E&M and 2bit-R2), and record signaling (DP, DTMF and
MFCR2)).
For further details on how to configure a TME1 module with E1 CAS access refer to the
programs Help system.
If the module does not initialize, check its status on the 7-segment display (see
TME1 module on page 3-69).

Operation
7.4.7 S2M Maintenance

The S2M Maintenance is an administrative program for configuring a TME1 module with S2
access.
Hardware Requirements:
Serial interface communications (COM port).
With the S2M Maintenance you can do the following:
Download software
Remove traces
Select the softwares type of connection to the module (local or via modem)
Select a COM port
For further details on how to configure a TME1 module with E1 CAS access refer to the
programs Help system.
If the module does not initialize, check its status on the 7-segment display (see
TME1 module on page 3-69).
Availability of the HiPath 1100 Manager, HiPath 1100 ADSL Manager, E1 Trunk
Manager e S2M Maintenance administration software is subject to the clients
completion of the technical course for users of the equipment.
7.4.8 Account Manager (CDR)

Billing Data Software
To launch the Account Manager select:
Start/Programs/HiPath 1100/Call Detail Recording
7.4.9 Status Monitor indicator

Status Monitor Indicator on the computer.
To start a Status Monitor Indicator, select:
Start/Programs/HiPath 1100/StatusMonitor

Operation
7.4.10 MOH Transfer Wizard

MIDI Transmission Wizard for converting MIDI files to HiPath 1100 format and transferring to
the system. This MIDI file will replace the internal music source
To start the MIDI Transmission Wizard, select:
Start/Programs/HiPath 1100/MOH Transfer
7.4.11 Software Update

HiPath 1100 system software updates are made using the Software Update application.
There are two ways to start the Software Update:
Click the Windows Start Menu to activate:

Start/Programs/Siemens HiPath 1100/Software Update.
Access the HiPath 1100 Manager Menu Bar:

Tools/Software Update
This application provides step by step information on how to proceed in the software update.
Use the "Next" button to go to the next step of the configuration procedure. Use the "Back"
button to go back to the previous step in the procedure.
The software is updated in two steps:
1. Transfer data from the system software to HiPath 1100 . During this procedure the
extensions operate as usual.
2. Load the system software into the memory. The telephones do not work during this period
(approximately 3 minutes).
For further information, consult the HiPath 1100 Manager Help file.
7.4.12 CAPI Applications

CallBridge for Data Utilities. ISDN software for applications such as Internet access, sending
and receiving group Fax 3/4, Euro File Transfer, telephone emulation, etc.

Operation
7.4.13 Interaction Center Smart (Optional Software)

This software application can be used with the HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems. It provides
monitoring and tracking capabilities for supervisors of one or more UCD Groups and up to 32
Agents. The application provides real time data with respect to agent status, incoming calls,
queues, answered calls detailing statistics by group or agent, as well as other data to help
manage a Call Center. With the Smart software you can determine the number of calls
received, the number of calls lost, the time periods with a higher volume of calls, and other
information.
The system helps you assess and improve your organizations service by providing information
through an online tool or by generating reports to help reduce client loss while helping estimate
the number of attendants needed. The Interaction Center Smart solution consists of two tools:
Monitor - A tool that provides continuous tracking of services for real time management of
agents, queued calls, group statistics including the number of calls answered, calls abandoned.
Analyst - A tool that provides supervisors with complete flexibility to perform statistical analysis
by group or by agent, and for specific periods of time. Reports can be configured to show
detailed information on the number of calls received, calls answered, calls abandoned, calls
transferred, calls answered within or outside a profile set, ACD calls duration, total talk time,
total queue time, and other data.
7.4.14 TAC Smart - Telephony Advanced Control (optional software)

This application can be used with the HiPath1150/1190/1190R systems to help identify and
display all information about a specific call. It delivers key telephony functions to the users PC,
including extension status monitoring, speed dialing capability, list of calls made and calls
received, contacts, all the while making calls automatically to a preset list of numbers.
This software integrates with other systems to display pop-up screens and send data to
existing applications.
7.4.15 CallReport (optional software)

CallReport is a billing system that allows you to record information about calls originated or
received by your PABX system.
CallReport runs on a regular PC under a Windows 95 / 98 /NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP environment. It
receives data sent by the PABX that are then processed and stored in a PC hard disk and
identified by extension, time, call duration, trunk, outgoing route and call cost. Subsequently, it
can generate reports containing total cost by extensions, sectors, and groups, among others,
in addition to incoming and outgoing traffic reports.
All the information is specified in the CallReport database and can be manipulated by the user
logged in as Administrator.

Operation
7.4.16 VMIe Protocol (Voice Mail Interface - extended)

Voice Mail with analog connections require the VMIe protocol. Voice Mail communication takes
place via DTMF signals that contain the following information:
Type of Call (TOC)

Required
1
Fixed size: 4 characters
Format: ***n (n = code in table below)
Code Type of Call Code Type of Call
1 Internal call to the Voice mail system 2 Not used
3 Call Forwarding (*11) 4 Second Attendant (*14)
5 Not used 6 Not used
7 Not used 8 Not used
Calling extension
Required
Fixed size: 6 DTMF signals
2 Format: ****i (i = calling extension)
External call format: always ******
Note: if an extension is longer, the DTMF digit * in the protocol is replaced by the
additional extension digit.
Extension called
Required element for calls Type 3 and 4.
This element remains blank for all types of calls.
3 Fixed size: 6 DTMF signals
Format: ****i (i = extension called)
Note: if an extension is longer, the DTMF digit * in the protocol is replaced by the
additional extension digit.
Additional information about the calling extension
Optional item
4
Fixed size: 2 DTMF signals
Format: *i (i = code in table below)
Code Information
1 The Calling Extension is a standard internal extension
2 Not used
3 The calling extension is an external user on an analog line.
4 The calling extension is an external user on a digital line

Operation
Examples:
1. Internal call from Extension 16 to the VMIe Group: ***1***16*1
2. Direct internal call from Extension 15 to Extension 11, forwarded to the VMIe Group (*11):
***3****15****11*1
3. Direct internal call from Extension 11 to Extension 15, forwarded to the VMIe Group
configured as second Attendant. ***4****11****15*1
4. Incoming call over an external analog line to Extension 11, forwarded (*11) to the VMIe
Group: ***3**********11*3
5. Incoming call over a digital line to Extension 11, forwarded (*11) to the VMIe Group:
***3**********11*4
6. Incoming call over an external analog line to Extension 12 which is forwarded to the VMIe
Group configured as Second Attendant: ***4**********12*3
7. Incoming call over a digital line to Extension 12, forwarded to the VMIe Group configured
as second Attendant. ***4**********12*4
(*11): ***3**1015**1011*1
configured as second Attendant. ***4*10015*10011*1.
Voice Mail Protocol for the system:
The Voice Mail indicates when there is a message waiting at an extensions mailbox using a
DTMF service code (*68) followed by the extension number. When a message is erased, a
different DTMF code (#68) is used to deactivate the signal at the extension that belongs to the
VMIe Group. In addition, these codes can be re-programmed if they are not supported by the
Voice mail system. Please check the items "Deactivating the Internal MWI #68" and "Activating
the Internal MWI Internal *68" in the HiPath 1100 Manager "System Settings - Service Code"
folder.
Example:
1. The Voice mail system indicates that Extension 13 has a message waiting in mailbox :
*6813
2. The Voice mail system indicates that the mailbox for extension 12 is empty: #6812.

Operation

Numbering Plan
8 Feature access codes

The HiPath 1100 has a Numbering Plan that can be programmed using the HiPath 1100
Manager or by entering codes on the telephone keypad.
8.1 Numbering Plan
Description HiPath 1120 HiPath 1150 HiPath 1190

External line 801 to 808 801 to 822 801 to 845
Extension, including S0 11 to 30 11 to 60 101 to 240
610 to 645
Group of external lines 0 or 890 to 899
Call Group (CG) 770 to 779
Hunt Group (HG) 780 to 789
UCD subscriber group 790 to 799
Carrier 9
EVM - Default internal number 790
EVM - Message Ports 7491 and 7492
EVM - Virtual Ports 744 to 747
Fax/DID - Virtual Message Ports 740 to 743
USB/CAPI line 10 100
Substitution for the * e # key 75 and 76 respectively

Symbols
8.2 Symbols
Symbols Explanation
Enter numbers, keys, password, internal or external numbers,

ll, q, p ... etc.
w Signaling with a short beep
n/t Lift/Replace the handset
s Initiate conversation
Service Menu
Service Menu
Programmable key is ON
Programmable key deleted
Blinking Programmable Key
< > and : Navigation keys
8.3 Features
System telephone features can be selected as follows:
1. Using the Navigation keys in the Main Menu
2. Using the Feature key then browsing the feature option list
3. Using the Feature key and its associated Feature Code
4. Using a programmable key
Feature Code
System telephone functions
Mailbox access Mailbox

keyprogrammed as MWI
Call charge consultation qji

Features
Feature Code
Call Forwarding
p
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding

Deactivation
Parking Parking
d to mposition
Parking
Resuming a Call Parking d to m position
Caller list rlf list < > and :
Programming a Feature for a Key qme Select a key<>

feature to be programmed and :
Redial Redial
Activate/deactivate speakerphone
Speaker
Speaker
Activate/deactivate speaker
s Speaker
Checking Relay Status rmheh

Seizure of an external line
External call dp
External call using a group of
external lines
lmd.lmm p external line
Seizure of a Specific external

Line
lde.lhi p external line

Features
Feature Code
Internet Access
Activation
qhmg p external line
Internet Access
Deactivation
rhmg p external line
1) Wait for w F The telephone rings. n
p external line s
External line reservation
Busy or
2) Service Menu qil t

The telephone rings. n p external s
Functions used when making calls
System Speed Dial qk + ddd.fhm
Individual speed dialing qk + qd.qh
Individual Speed Dialing

qmf + qd.qh CHANGE? :
v wait for w
Programming
p number SAVE?
Speakerphone Auto-Answering
Mode qmj wait for w
Activation
Speakerphone Auto-Answering
Mode rmj wait for w
Deactivation
qld p extension with system telephone

Direct communication call
wait for w s speak the message
Internal call p extension
Calling a Call Group (CG) kkd.kkm

Features
Feature Code
Calling a Hunt Group (HG) kld.klm

UCD Subscriber Group kmd.kmm
1) n p (currently busy) Wait for w s
or
Urgent Call
Extension busy
2) n p (currently busy) Service Menu
qil s
Hotline
(if programmed)
ns
Warmline
(If programmed)
n Wait for s
Override p busy extension Service Menu
Busy extension
qjf s
LCR Bypass qhi + p Carrier + number s
View time limitations rji
Silent Monitoring
(busy extension)
qmhh p busy extension s
1) p no answer CHANGE? : or
Callback qil w Wait for. The telephone rings n s
Activation
(Extension does not answer or is or
busy)
2) Wait for w t
Wait. The telephone rings n s
Callback
Deactivation
ril

Features
Feature Code
Carrier m
Using a temporary MSN to make

qhe p MSN slot or MSN number
a call
p external line p external number
Functions used during calls
Cost Code qjd p cost code r p number
s Consultation p number
Conference
s Service Menu qg s
Consultation
(To end a consultation wait for the s Consultation p s
call to be disconnected)
Parking s Service Menu qij + d.m

Recovering a parked
call
rij + d.m s
General Parking s General Parking t

Recovering a parked external call qjg + p line s
Toggle
(Use after Consultation for answer-
ing s Service Menu qf s
a second call or an
urgent call)
Suffix Dialing s p data

Recovering a Call on Hold
s Service Menu qd
if busy or no answer

Features
Feature Code
Transfer
(when an alternate analog line Internal:
operates with "Polarity
Reversal" or an external digital line s p extension t
is being used
wait for the call to be answered
for the Transfer. Otherwise, External:
there is no need to wait for
a transfer call without s < > TRANSFER? v p number (s)
consultation to be answered)
Functions used when receiving calls

Mailbox access p Voice mail group
Service Menu qii

or
Answering a call on hold s Service Menu qf s
or
CALL WTNG? :
qik
Group pickup or
CALL PCKP GRP? :
Individual pickup qim p extension
Call forwarding on an analog
line:
Call Forwarding to external

Number
qee p external line :
qee p extension, Voice mail group, Group

Internal call forwarding
Group or Fax/DID :
Call forwarding
Deactivating
ree

Features
Feature Code
Call forward no answer or busy qeh p extension, Voice mail group, Call
Activating group or external line :
Call forward no answer or busy

Deactivation
reh
Do Not Disturb
Activation
qmk
Do Not Disturb
Deactivation
rmk
EVM:
Consultation at the extension

being used
kmd VM group p password
Consultation from a different kmd VM group p password p exten-

extension sions
Consultation from an external

s p its external number + q
extension
p password p extension
Miscellaneous Functions
Service Menu qje
Entrance telephone
or
Door Opener
Service Menu qje p extension
General Alarm
Deactivating
rmheh p password
qmg p current password p new password

Electronic lock password change
p confirm new password w
Electronic Lock
Activation
qjj p password

Features
Feature Code
Electronic Lock
Deactivation
rjj p password
Busy signal when extension is

busy qmhee :
Activation
Busy signal when extension is

busy rmhee
Deactivation
System Programming Mode

Activation
qmi p password p codes:
Deactivating a Feature (Call

forwarding, Do not disturb, Data
Data protection, Alarm clock, Call-
back
rd
and Speakerphone Auto-Answering
Mode)
Language/Country configuration qmhef p country code:

Call Group (CG) and Hunt Group qli p group (if the extension belongs to
(HG) Login more than one group)
Call Group (CG) and Hunt Group rli p group (if the extension belongs to
(HG) Logout more than one group)
Room Monitor
(Babyphone)
qll
Music on Hold
Activation
qmhed Music
Music on Hold
Deactivation
rmhed
Remote configuration
HiPath 1100 Manager
qmmf

Features
Feature Code
1) local programming extension is talking to remote

programmer:
qmme w F
Remote programmer must provide:
Remote configuration p password p programming codes
using a standard MF telephone
or
2) Remote programmer dials the system and is attended

by the Fax/DID feature:
qmi p password p Programming codes
Data protection
Activation
qhmd
Data protection
Deactivation
rhmd
Relay
Activation qmd
(For HiPath 1120 only)
Relay
Deactivation rmd
(For HiPath 1120 only)
Night service
Activation
qhh p password
Night service
Deactivation
rhh p password
Call Waiting tone - Activation n rlk w t

Call Waiting tone - Deactivation n qlk w t
COS (Class of Service)
Changeover
qidl p extension p password
PABX Trace log qekk

Starts

Features
Feature Code
PABX Trace log rekk

Stops
Extended PABX Trace log qekl

to enable
Extended PABX Trace log rekl

to disable
Alarm Clock
Alarm Clock
(Daily)
qhje p time (for example 1230):
Alarm Clock
(Daily, except weekends )
qhjf p time (for example 1230):
Alarm Clock
(After a specified time)
qhjg p time (e.g. 1230) :
Alarm Clock qhjh p date/time (for example

(For a specified date and time) 24121830):
Alarm clock
Deactivating
rhj :
UCD Subscriber group functions
Agent available qhdf

Agent unavailable rhdf
UCD Subscriber Group kmd.kmm
Logging into a UCD Subscriber qhde p group:
group (If it belongs to more than one )
Logging off a UCD Subscriber

Group
rhde
UCD Agent in Service qhdg

Features
Feature Code
UCD Agent out of service rhdg

Show queue size to UCD agent qhdi
Satellite PABX
Flash on external Analog Line Service Menu qie
Operation as Satellite PABX lmd.lmm p number of the line
Special Functions for ISDN Lines
Immediate Call Forwarding for
MSN qjhe p external line w p MSN
Activation
Immediate Call Forwarding for

MSN rjhe w
Deactivation
Call Forwarding - No Answer, for

MSN qjhf p external line w p MSN
Activating
Call Forwarding - No Answer, for

MSN rjhf w
Deactivation
Call Forwarding for MSN when

the line is busy qjhg p external line w p MSN
Activation
Call Forwarding - Busy, for MSN

Ofactivation
rjhg w
Anonymous caller ID (Trace) Service Menu qlh

Sending Restriction for MSN -
Activation
qlj

Features
Feature Code
Sending Restriction for MSN -

Deactivation
rlj
Using Features provided by a

Carrier on ISDN Lines
qidg p external line p ISDN code
Note:
7 For Korea the numbering plan changes as follows:
a) Access to the group of external lines is done with digit "9" instead of "0"
b) Calling an operator terminal is done with digit "0" instead of "9"
a) Group call pickup is done with sequence "*0" instead of "*57"
a) Recovery of a parked call is done with sequence "*57" instead of "*0";
Feature Codes can be changed in the HiPath 1100 Manager. An expert should
be consulted in this case.

Abbreviations
9 Abbreviations
General list
This list presents the abbreviations used in this manual.
Table 9-1 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
ACS Alternative Carrier Selection
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
ARG Argentina
BRA Brazil
CAPI Common ISDN Application Program Interface
CAS Channel-Associated Signaling
CD Carrier Detect
CHN China
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CND Canada
COS Class of Access (Class of Service)
CTI Computer Telephony Integration
CTS Clear To Send
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DP Dial pulse telephone
DSR Data Send Ready
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
DTR Data Terminal Ready
E1 Primary Access
EB Expansion Board
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecomunications Standard Institute
EWAKO External Toll Restriction / Denied Numbers and Permission Lists
GND Ground
HKZ Main Station Interface / Analog Trunk
IM International Market

Abbreviations
Table 9-1 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
IND India
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Networks
LAN Local Area Network
MB Basic Module
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MF Analog Multifrequency telephone
MO Optional Module
MOH Music on Hold
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number
NT Network Terminator
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PEN Protection Conductor plus Neuter conductor
PMP Point Multipoint Connection
PP Point to Point Connection
PSU Power supply unit
RSA Republic of South Africa
RTC Real time clock
RTS Request To Send
RUF Ring
RxD Receive Data
S0 Basic Access
SPA Spain
SW Software
TAPI Telephony Applications Programming Interface
TFE Trfernsprecher (Entrance Telephone)
TN-C-S Power supply systems with Phase, Neuter (grounded) and Ground
TN-S Power supply systems with Phase, Neuter (grounded)
TxD Transmit Data
UCD Universal Call Distribution
USB Universak Serial Bus
VMIe Extended voice mail interface

Abbreviations

Index Z E
E1 Trunk Manager 7-362
E821 ST System Telephone 5-195
E822-ST System Telephone 5-196
A E822-ST System telephone 5-193
Abbreviations 3-44 Entrance telephone 3-103
Accident Report 1-23 external entrance telephone 3-112
Adapter cable for analog modem 3-118 Internal entrance telephone - interface 3-
ADSL module 6-275 103
Assigning button pad contacts 3-110 Environmental conditions 2-40
Expansion module (EB)
B HiPath 1120 3-58
Backplane 3-101 HiPath 1150/1190 3-61
Batteries 3-98 External line settings 6-210, 6-237
C F
Call Detail Recording Fax/DID module Configuration 6-226
Programming code 6-223 Fax/DID module configuration 6-228
Call detail Recording Feature access codes 8-369
Description 6-262
Checking the protective ground connection G
4-184 General settings 6-218
Configuring a Relay and Sensor on the Hi- Getting to know your systems 4-128
Path 1120 6-275 Grothe door opener 3-105
Configuring an internal entrance telephone
H
6-262
HiPath 1100 ADSL Manager 7-336, 7-352
Configuring the System Specifically for the
HiPath 1100 Configurations 2-27
Client 6-205
HiPath 1100 System Installation 4-125
Connecting extensions to the systems Inter-
HiPath 1100 System Periphery 2-28
nal MDF 4-170
Connecting the system to the power supply I
7-278 Important Information 1-18
D Installation Procedures 4-126
Data Protection and Confidentiality 1-24 Installing a USB Interface 4-178
Installing a V.24 Interface 4-177
Dial Pulse (DP) and Dual Tone Multifrequen-
Installing an entrance telephone 4-180
cy (MF) 5-204
Digital Trunk 6-269, 6-271 Installing an external Audio Source 4-180
Installing expansion and optional modules 4-
Dimensions of the HiPath 1120 system 4-128
138
Dimensions of the HiPath 1150 system 4-130
DISA 6-218 Installing modules 4-145
Installing telephone terminals 4-186
Documentation list 2-41
Installing the batteries 4-169
Installing the Power Supply Unit (PSU) 4-163
Interconnect cable 3-122
Service Manual 385

Interconnect cables 3-113 Programming mode syntax 7-279
Internal entrance telephone 6-223 Programming with a computer 7-280
Issues concerning changes to the default Protection of external lines and extensions 4-
password 7-280 183
Protective power outage relays 4-185
L PSU specifications
List of modules 3-44 HiPath 1120 3-94
HiPath 1150/1190 3-95
M
Main Configurations 6-208 R
Main Distribution Frame (MDF) 3-100 Relay and sensor configuration on the HiPath
Modules 3-43 1120 6-233
Overview 3-43 Remote Administration 6-222
Motherboard (MB) 3-50 Ritto door opener 3-106
HiPath 1120 3-52 Run quick test 6-234
HiPath 1150 3-55
S
N S2M Maintenance 7-363
Numbering Plan 6-205 Safety Information 1-18
caution 1-21
O warning 1-20
Optional module (MO) Safety information
TME1 module 3-69 danger 1-19
Optional modules (MO) 3-80 Safety Symbols 1-18
CD 16 module 3-90 Select the location for installing the equip-
Fax/DID module 3-88 ment 4-127
S0 module 3-66 Size of the HiPath 1190/1190R 4-132
UP0/E module and CTR UP0/E module 3- Size of the HiPath1190/1190R 4-132
77 System cabling 4-186
Optional modules(MO) HiPath 1120 System Data 2-26
Music module 3-91 System expansion limitations 2-30
System Telephone Feature Keys 5-203
P
System telephone settings 5-204
Performing a visual inspection 4-189
System Telephones 5-191
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 3-93
Power Systems 2-26 T
Powering/Protecting the System 4-182 Table of the Systems Programming Codes
Profiset 3030 System Telephone 5-192 6-207
Programming Technical standards and compliance 2-39
Digital trunk 6-230 Telephones 5-191
Programming an Extension 6-212 TME1 Coax Cable 3-120
Programming an extension 6-241 TME1 module Connector assignments 3-71
Programming comments 6-234 TME1 Serial Cable 3-117
Programming Mode 7-278
386 Service Manual

U
Unpacking system components 4-128
Updating the Software 6-222, 7-364
USB adapter cable 3-116
Using a Telephone Set 7-279
V
V.24 Adapter Cable 3-113
Voice Mail 6-218
W
What to do in Case of an Emergency 1-23
Service Manual 387

388 Service Manual
www.siemens-enterprise.com
The information in this document provides only general descriptions of

the features. The actual features may not correspond exactly to the
descriptions herein and, furthermore, they are subject to changes to the
extent that products continue to be developed.
The selection of features to be provided is not binding unless explicitly
established in the terms of the contract.
All trademarks mentioned herein belong to Siemens Enterprise
Communications GmbH & Co. KG or to their respective owners.
This device complies with EU Directive 1999/5/EG, as attested by

the CE Mark.
This device is manufactured according to a Certified Sy-

stem for Environmental Management (ISO 14001). This process
ensures that energy and raw material consumption, as well as
emissions produced from industrial waste, are kept to a mini-
mum.
Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG

Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG
*1PA31003-K1270-S100-5-7620* is a Trademark Licensee of Siemens AG
Ref. No.: A31003-K1270-S100-5-7620
Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.
28.7.08 V7.0

Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HiPath 1100

Service Manual Installation

The device conforms to the EU directive Operation

3.5.2 HiPath1150/1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

4.9 Connections to the systems MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170

6.2.8 Internal entrance telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223

7.3.2.3 CAPI Application setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-331

Figure 2-1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Figure 3-36 MDF - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101

Figure 4-26 Installing an EVM module on the HiPath 1190/1190R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Figure 7-14 Installation Setup - USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-297

Figure 7-58 SW Router ADSL firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-337

Table 2-1 Specific limitations to system expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Table 6-13 Remote administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223

1.1 Safety Information

This symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which may

This symbol identifies useful information.

1-18 Service Manual

Other symbols that indicate potential hazardous situations

Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser

1.1.1 Safety Information: danger

Make sure power is turned off while equipment is being serviced.

Working on low voltage network circuits

Service Manual 1-19

1.1.2 Safety Information: warning

Hazards when working with large gauge cables

1-20 Service Manual

1.1.3 Safety Information: Caution

Checking and Measuring Voltage

Main Circuit Breaker

ESD Protection for Components (ESD)

Layout of the Cables

Service Manual 1-21

1.1.4 General Information

Location of Safety Equipment

Inspecting your Tools

Hazards at the location of operation

1-22 Service Manual

1.1.5 What to do in Case of an Emergency

Procedures to follow during Accidents

1.1.6 Accident Report

Service Manual 1-23

1.2 Data Protection and Confidentiality

Handling of Personal Information

Guidelines for Siemens Employees

Guidelines for Handling Information

1-24 Service Manual

1.3 Structure of this Service Manual

Main sections of this Manual.

Service Manual 1-25

About this chapter

2-26 Service Manual

2.3 Configurations HiPath 1100

Figure 2-1 System Overview

Service Manual 2-27

2.4 HiPath 1100 System Periphery

System Telephones C/D Service PC